0% found this document useful (0 votes)
8 views242 pages

01 Panacea

The Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual provides comprehensive instructions for the installation, configuration, and operation of the Panacea frame and modules. It includes details on product features, installation procedures, and troubleshooting communications issues. The manual is copyrighted by Harris Corporation and is intended for authorized use only.

Uploaded by

Txrm Ops
Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
0% found this document useful (0 votes)
8 views242 pages

01 Panacea

The Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual provides comprehensive instructions for the installation, configuration, and operation of the Panacea frame and modules. It includes details on product features, installation procedures, and troubleshooting communications issues. The manual is copyrighted by Harris Corporation and is intended for authorized use only.

Uploaded by

Txrm Ops
Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
You are on page 1/ 242

Panacea Series Frame and Modules

Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual

Edition R
P-FR MAN
Panacea Series
Frame and Modules

Installation, Configuration, and


Operation Manual

Edition R
June 2008
Copyright Information
Copyright 2008 Harris Corporation, 1025 West NASA Boulevard, Melbourne,
Florida 32919-0001 U.S.A. All rights reserved. This publication supersedes all
previous releases. Printed in Canada.
This product and related documentation are protected by copyright and are
distributed under licenses restricting their use, copying, distribution, and
decompilation. No part of this product or related documentation may be reproduced
in any form by any means without prior written authorization of Harris Corporation
and its licensors, if any.
This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.
Changes are periodically added to the information herein; these changes will be
incorporated into new editions of the publication. Harris Corporation may make
improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in
this publication at any time.

Warranty Information
The limited warranty policy provides a complete description of your warranty cov-
erage, limitations, and exclusions, as well as procedures for obtaining warranty ser-
vice. To view the complete warranty, visit our website.
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Contents

Preface
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .vii
Manual Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii
Unpacking/Shipping Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xii
Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv

Chapter 1: Introduction
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Frame Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Main Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Frame Sizes and Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Frame Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Control Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Panacea Module Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Analog Audio Routing Switchers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Analog Video Routing Switchers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Serial Digital Video Routing Switchers (3 Gb/HS/S/R) . . . . . . . . 24
Clean/Quiet Switch Routing Switchers (P16SCQ/P16HSCQ) . . . 37
Serial Digital (AES) Audio Routing Switchers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Chapter 2: Installation
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Installing the Panacea Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Siting Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Mounting Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Mechanical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Mounting a Panacea Frame in the Rack Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Mounting a Panacea Frame in the Rack Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
In-Frame Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Control Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Setting Up the Power Supply Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Fan Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Installation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Installing Panacea Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Field Upgrading the Panacea System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual iii
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Contents

Chapter 3: Configuration
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Frame Configuration Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Resource Module DIP Switch and Jumper Summary . . . . . . . . . . 62
Configuring the Panacea MI and Resource Module . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Back Panel Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Module Configuration Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Analog Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Analog Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Serial Digital Video (HS/S/R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Clean/Quiet Switch (P-SCQ, P-HSCQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
AES Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Chapter 4: Operation
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Control Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Front Panel Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Firmware-Based Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Software-Based Control Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Control Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Program Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
DIP Switch Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Chapter 5: Serial Control Configuration and Operation


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Serial Control Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Serial Port Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Serial Port RS-232/RS-422 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Operation Using Harris Terminal Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
DIP Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Communications Interlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
The Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
System Operations and Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Operation Using GVG TEN-XL ASCII Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
TEN-XL ASCII Serial Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
TEN-XL ASCII Protocol: Programming Reference . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Exceptions from the TEN-XL ASCII Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
String Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
TEN-XL ASCII Protocol: Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Operation Using GVG TEN-XL SMPTE (Binary) Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . 103
TEN-XL SMPTE Serial Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Definition of the TEN-XL SMPTE Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
TEN-XL SMPTE Protocol - Programming Reference . . . . . . . . 104
A Note on Standard Reserved Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Exceptions to TEN-XL SMPTE Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Packet Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
TEN-XL SMPTE Protocol: Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

iv Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Contents

Chapter 6: Troubleshooting Communications Issues


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Checking Serial Settings (Standard and Enhanced Resource Modules) . . 114
Checking the DIP Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Checking the Modem Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Checking the Resource Module Ribbon Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Checking P-MI Module Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Checking X-Y and Genlock Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Checking Programmed Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Checking Ethernet Settings (Enhanced Modules Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Chapter 7: Specifications
Frame Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Analog Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Analog Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Multirate/Standard Definition/Clean Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
3 Gb Serial Digital Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Clean/Quiet Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
AES Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Appendix A: Safety Precautions, Certifications, and


Compliances
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Safety Terms and Symbols in this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Safety Terms and Symbols on the Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Preventing Electrostatic Discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Injury Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Product Damage Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
EMC and Safety Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
EMC Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Additional EMC Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Safety Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Appendix B: Terminal Operation


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Establishing a Terminal Operation Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Establishing a Terminal Operation Session for
Serial Control Interface Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Establishing a Telnet Session for Ethernet Control
Interface Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Network Configuration from Terminal Control Mode . . . . . . . . 150
Telnet Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Telnet Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
User Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Virtual (Network) X-Y Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Appendix C: Terminal Operation Commands for a


Panacea Standard Module
Startup Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual v
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Contents

Command Summary Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154


List of Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Appendix D: Terminal Operation Commands for a


Panacea Enhanced Module
Startup Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
System Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Command Summary Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
List of Terminal Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
SHOW MENU [#] Subcommands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Appendix E: Device Alarm List


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Device Alarm List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Appendix F: Error Messages and Hexadecimal Numbers


X-Y Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Class 1 Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Class 2 Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Class 3 Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Zero-Based Hexadecimal Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Appendix G: Enhanced Resource Module Installation


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Removing the Existing Resource Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Installing the New Resource Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Reattaching the Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Appendix H: Power Supply Mounting Tray Installation


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Tools You’ll Need . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Pre-Installation Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Installing a 1RU Desktop Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Installing Multiple 1RU Desktop Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Installing a 2RU Desktop Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Installing Multiple 2RU Desktop Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Installing a Combination of 1RU and 2RU
Desktop Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Installing a Power Supply Mounting Tray into a Frame Rack . . . . . . . . . . 209

Appendix I: Fan Module Replacement


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Uninstalling an Existing Fan Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Installing a Replacement Fan Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Index
Keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

vi Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preface

Overview
Panacea is the remedy that the industry has long sought for the frustrating
compromises traditionally associated with meeting small routing needs:
Economical or flexible? Compact or multiformat? Affordable solution for
today's routing requirements or sizeable investment into future-proofed
technology? You couldn't have it all — until now.
The exciting Panacea product line encompasses an entirely new family of
routing switchers.
• It’s today’s routing platform for tomorrow’s next generation requirements.
• It’s a future-proofed, economical and compact, easy to use, multi/
mixed-format router, offering flexible configurations/options for utility and
on-air applications.
• It’s a piece of “glue” that fits your small routing needs today and provides
you with the tools you need to embrace the future.
The Panacea routing switcher series is designed to add a new tier of up to 32×32
routing matrices.

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual vii
Preface

Manual Information
Purpose
This manual details the features, installation, operation, maintenance, and
specifications for the Panacea frame and system configuration.

Audience
This manual is written for technicians and operators responsible for installation,
setup, maintenance, and/or operation of the product, and is useful to operations
personnel for purposes of daily operation and reference.

Revision History
Table P-1. Revision History of Manual
Edition Date Comments
Edition A May 2003 Initial production release
Edition B June 2003 Corrected settings shown for NO/NC jumpers
for the alarm port
Edition C July 2003 Added instructions for installing a Panacea
power supply mounting tray
Added instructions for installing a Panacea
integrated power supply
Edition D September 2003 Updated “Servicing a Panacea Product”
information
Added instructions for installing an enhanced
resource module
Updated instructions for replacing a fan module
Edition E October 2003 Added information about menu selections for
Menu F, Menu H, Menu M, and Menu R
Added information about timing mode options,
and about simple and advanced matrix
partitioning modes
Edition F June 2004 Added information concerning GVG ASCII and
GVG SMPTE serial protocols
Updated RS-422 serial control port pin
assignments table
Updated DIP switch information to show
multi-matrix addressing mode
Edition G September 2004 Updated DIP switch information to show IP
mode for enhanced modules
Updated SET FIRSTLEVEL, SET
FIRSTDESTINATION, AND SET
FIRSTSOURCE commands

viii Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preface

Table P-1. Revision History of Manual (Continued)


Edition Date Comments
Edition H October 2004 Updated SET SLEWRATE commands for both
standard and enhanced modules
Updated SHOW SLEWRATE command for
enhanced modules
Edition I January 2005 Added integrated power supply specification
information and DC power supply information
Edition J September 2005 Removed integrated power supply information
Added module information in lieu of separate
module-specific manuals
Updated commands section into tabular format
Added information concerning SNMP Agent
for Panacea routers
Edition K October 2005 Added special instructions for dual matrix,
same-signal format routing switchers
Edition L November 2005 Added section on troubleshooting
communications issues
Edition M February 2006 Added information concerning AES
asynchronous, synchronous, and cross-fade
switching
Added initial setup guide for protocol
translation
Edition N March 2006 Moved SNMP information to the Simple
Network Management Protocol for Panacea
and Edge Products Installation and
Configuration Manual
Edition O June 2006 Removed initial setup guide for protocol
translation
Edition P October 2006 Add instructions for P-SCQ/P-HSCQ clean
switch reclock mode setup and autotiming
Edition Q December 2006 Updated alarm information
Edition R June 2008 Added 3 Gb product information

Applications
The Panacea platform is ideal for space-constrained operations demanding full
local and remote control capabilities in a routing solution.
Panacea products are perfect for
• Television production facilities
• Cable operators
• Production and post-production facilities
• Outside broadcast vans/trucks
• DBS satellite operations

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual ix
Preface

• Webcasters
• Telcos where professional end-users require a small, flexible, high quality
routing matrix with the ability to mix and match signal formats and/or
signal processing functions within the same frame

Writing Conventions
To enhance your understanding, the authors of this manual have adhered to the
following text conventions:

Table P-2. Writing Conventions


Term or Description
Convention
Bold Indicates dialog boxes, property sheets, fields, buttons, check
boxes, list boxes, combo boxes, menus, submenus, windows,
lists, and selection names
Italics Indicates E-mail addresses, the names of books or publications,
and the first instances of new terms and specialized words that
need emphasis
CAPS Indicates a specific key on the keyboard, such as ENTER, TAB,
CTRL, ALT, or DELETE
Code Indicates variables or command-line entries, such as a DOS
entry or something you type into a field
> Indicates the direction of navigation through a hierarchy of
menus and windows
hyperlink Indicates a jump to another location within the electronic
document or elsewhere
Internet address Indicates a jump to a Web site or URL
Indicates important information that helps to avoid and
Note troubleshoot problems

Obtaining Documents
Technical documents can be viewed or downloaded from our website.
Alternatively, contact your Customer Service representative to request a
document.

x Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preface

Unpacking/Shipping Information
Unpacking a Product
This product was carefully inspected, tested, and calibrated before shipment to
ensure years of stable and trouble-free service.
1. Check equipment for any visible damage that may have occurred during
transit.
2. Confirm that you have received all items listed on the packing list.
3. Contact your dealer if any item on the packing list is missing.
4. Contact the carrier if any item is damaged.
5. Remove all packaging material from the product and its associated
components before you install the unit.
Keep at least one set of original packaging, in the event that you need to return a
product for servicing.

Product Servicing
The Panacea product line is not designed for extensive field service; however,
some field service changes can be done on-site. The following list provides the
types of field service changes allowable for a Panacea product. You can perform
these field service changes yourself; instructions for performing these changes
can be found on the following pages:.
• Installing an enhanced resource card in place of a standard resource card
(pages 195–199)
• Changing a fan module (not applicable in all formats) (pages 211–214)
• Installing an optional power supply mounting tray (pages 201–209)
You can perform these field service changes yourself; instructions for
performing these changes are included with the equipment.
• Installing an optional integrated power supply mounting bracket assembly
and integrated power supply
A Field Service representative must perform the following field services
changes. (Alternatively, you may return your Panacea product to the Customer
Service department for upgrade.) Contact your Customer Service representative
for more information about these field service changes.
• Adding a local control panel
• Adding an optional submodule (e.g., SDI reclocker submodule)
All other hardware upgrades, modifications, or repairs require you to return
your Panacea product to the service center.

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual xi
Preface

Standards
There are three different types of standards listed: product standards,
compliance standards, and safety standards.

Product Standards
Analog Audio
ANSI/SMPTE RP120-
For Analog Audio Inter-Modulation Testing (IMD)

Analog Video
SMPTE170M
Composite Analog Video Signal-NTSC for Studio Applications
SMPTE240M
Signal Parameters 1125-Line High-Definition Production Systems
ITU-R BT.470-6
Conventional Television System
SMPTE PR168
Definition of Vertical Interval Switching Point for Synchronous Video
Switching

Serial Digital Video


SMPTE 259M
SMPTE Standard for Television - 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite
Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface
SMPTE 292M
SMPTE Standard for Television - Bit-Serial Digital Interface for High
Definition Television Systems
SMPTE 344M
SMPTE Standard for Television - 540 Mb/s Serial Digital Interface
DVB-ASI
Digital Video Broadcasting Interfaces for CATV/SMATV Headends and
Similar Professional Equipment

xii Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preface

Clean/Quiet Switch
SMPTE 259M
SMPTE Standard for Television - 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite
Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface
SMPTE 272M
SMPTE Standard for Television - Formatting AES/EBU and Auxiliary Data into
Digital Video Ancillary Data Space
SMPTE 292M
SMPTE Standard for Television - Bit-Serial Digital Interface for High
Definition Television Systems
SMPTE 299M
SMPTE Standard for Television - 24-bit Digital Audio Format for HDTV
Bit-Serial Interface
SMPTE 344M
SMPTE Standard for Television - 540 Mb/s Serial Digital Interface
DVB-ASI
Digital Video Broadcasting Interfaces for CATV/SMATV Headends and
Similar Professional Equipment

AES Audio
Balanced Configuration
AES3-2003
AES Recommended Practice for Digital Audio Engineering — Serial
Transmission Format for Two-Channel Linearly Represented Digital Audio
Data
Unbalanced Configuration
AES3id-2001
AES Information Document for Digital Audio Engineering — Transmission of
AES3 Formatted Data by Unbalanced Coaxial Cable
SMPTE 276M-1995
SMPTE Standard for Television — Transmission of AES-EBU Digital Audio
Signals Over Coaxial Cable

Compliance and Safety Standards


Appendix A: ”Safety Precautions, Certifications, and Compliances” contains
compliance and safety standards.

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual xiii
Preface

Restriction on Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Directive


Directive 2002/95/EC—commonly known as the European Union (EU)
Restriction on Hazardous Substances (RoHS)—sets limits on the use of certain
substances found in electrical and electronic equipment. The intent of this
legislation is to reduce the amount of hazardous chemicals that may leach out of
landfill sites or otherwise contaminate the environment during end-of-life
recycling. The Directive, which took effect on July 1, 2006, refers to the
following hazardous substances:
• Lead (Pb)
• Mercury (Hg)
• Cadmium (Cd)
• Hexavalent Chromium (Cr-V1)
• Polybrominated Biphenyls (PBB)
• Polybrominated Diphenyl Ethers (PBDE)
In accordance with this EU Directive, all products sold in the European Union
will be fully RoHS-compliant and “lead-free.” (See our website for more infor-
mation on dates and deadlines for compliance.) Spare parts supplied for the
repair and upgrade of equipment sold before July 1, 2006 are exempt from the
legislation. Equipment that complies with the EU directive will be marked with
a RoHS-compliant symbol, as shown in Figure P-1.

Figure P-1. RoHS Compliance Symbol

xiv Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preface

Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment


(WEEE) Directive
The European Union (EU) Directive 2002/96/EC on Waste from Electrical and
Electronic Equipment (WEEE) deals with the collection, treatment, recovery,
and recycling of electrical and electronic waste products. The objective of the
WEEE Directive is to assign the responsibility for the disposal of associated
hazardous waste to either the producers or users of these products. Effective
August 13, 2005, producers or users will be required to recycle electrical and
electronic equipment at end of its useful life, and must not dispose of the
equipment in landfills or by using other unapproved methods. (Some EU
member states may have different deadlines.)
In accordance with this EU Directive, companies selling electric or electronic
devices in the EU will affix labels indicating that such products must be
properly recycled. (See our website for more information on dates and deadlines
for compliance.) Contact your local sales representative for information on
returning these products for recycling. Equipment that complies with the EU
directive will be marked with a WEEE-compliant symbol, as shown in Figure
P-2.

Figure P-2. WEEE Compliance Symbol

Safety
Carefully review all safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to
this product or any products connected to it. You will find a complete list of
safety precautions in Appendix A. Any user-serviceable components (such as
fuses or batteries) are only replaceable by those components listed in the
manual.
IMPORTANT! Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures.

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual xv
Preface

Safety Terms and Symbols in this Manual


WARNING
Statements identifying conditions or practices that may
result in personal injury or loss of life. High voltage is
present.

CAUTION
Statements identifying conditions or practices that can
result in damage to the equipment or other property.

xvi Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1
Introduction

Overview
This chapter includes the following topics:
• Frame Information
• “Product Description” on page 2
• “Main Features” on page 3
• “Frame Sizes and Types” on page 4
• “Frame Modules” on page 5
• “Control Features” on page 13
• Panacea Module Information
• “Analog Audio Routing Switchers” on page 16
• “Analog Video Routing Switchers” on page 21
• “Serial Digital Video Routing Switchers (3 Gb/HS/S/R)” on page 24
• “Clean/Quiet Switch Routing Switchers (P16SCQ/P16HSCQ)” on page
37
• “Serial Digital (AES) Audio Routing Switchers” on page 43

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 1
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Frame Information
Product Description
The Panacea family of routers is available in 1RU and 2 RU frame sizes. They
share a wide array of routing matrices and provide hooks for redundant power,
control, and extended processing modules. The frame architecture provides both
front and rear rack attachment capabilities, which allows for complementary
front-racked local control in the same rack space, as well as more flexible
systemization.
Both frame sizes include a power supply, a resource module, a serial control
port, a looping coaxial (X-Y) control port, and a looping sync input. Either
frame may be equipped with an optional local control panel.

Figure 1-1. Panacea Frame Architecture

2 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

All of the control modules attach to the inside of the front panel of the frame's
metal work. When attached, they provide control and monitoring
communications; access to the communication connectors (X-Y, serial, and
Ethernet); reference timing information; and get necessary power through a
connector to the module interconnect. All control and monitoring of the core
routing module is through a “get and set” protocol using a parallel data and
addressing scheme (see Figure 1-2).

Figure 1-2. Control/Communications Architecture

Main Features
All products in the Panacea series have following features:
• Include matrix sizes from 8×8 up to 16×16 audio/video routing in a 1RU
frame and matrix sizes from 8×8 up to 32×32 audio/video routing in a 2RU
frame (the 2RU frame allows for a single 32× module or multiple 16× or 8×
modules)
• Support a wide variety of supported signal types:
• Analog audio
• Analog video
• AES audio
• Standard definition serial digital video

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 3
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

• High definition serial digital video


• Allow “mix-and-match” of different signal types in the same 2RU frame
• Provide optional clean switching of S and HS video
• Provide optional quiet switching of AES/EBU signals
• Allow control via local panel, RS-232/RS-422, X-Y, or IP/Ethernet
• Incorporate signal diagnosis capabilities (signal presence, error detection,
etc.)
• Come with several power supply choices:
• Standard single or redundant AC desktop power supply
• Optional hot-swappable internal AC or DC power supply with
redundancy available in 2RU frames

Frame Sizes and Types


The Panacea series has two frame sizes: 1RU (see Figure 1-3) and 2RU (see
Figure 1-4). The 2RU size can accommodate any two 1RU back panels of any
signal format or combination of signal formats, and has different options
available for customizing. (Some aspects of frame customization and matrix
size specifics will be discussed in detail in each signal format’s individual
manual). Table 1-1 on page 5 provides dimensions, module and signal capacity,
standard equipment, and options for both 1RU and 2RU frame sizes.

Figure 1-3. Panacea 1RU Frame

Figure 1-4. Panacea 2RU Frame

4 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Table 1-1. Dimensions, Module and Signal Capacity, Standard


Equipment, and Options
Architecture 1RU 2RU
Dimensions
Width 19 in. (48.3 cm) 19 in (48.3 cm)
Depth 5.25 in. (13.3 cm) 5.25 in. (13.3 cm)
Height 1.75 in. (44 cm) 3.5 in. (88 cm)
Cabinet Size 19 in. (48.3 cm) 19 in. (48.3 cm)
Matrix Module Capacity 1 2 1RU units
or
1 2RU unit
Signal Capacity No. Matrix Sizes
One signal type Yes Yes
Two signal types No Yes
Standard Equipment
Desktop power supply 1 1
Logic control module 1 1
Upgrade Options
Redundant desktop power Yes Yes
supply
Integrated AC power supply Yes Yes
Integrated DC power supply Yes Yes
Redundant integrated AC power No Yes
supply
Redundant integrated DC power No Yes
supply
Fan module (HS, S, and A2 1 1
only)

Frame Modules

Note
Information concerning specific Panacea modules starts on
page 16.

The module types installed in the Panacea frame are as follows:


• Core Routing Module (BP – Back Panel)s
• Module Interconnect (MI)
• Resource Module
• Power Supply Module

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 5
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

• Fan Module
The frame’s modular components are highlighted in Figure 1-1 on page 2.
The frame supports deeper module sizes for future extended functionality. Also,
the supported matrices co-reside within the frame, thus allowing for an
integrated solution (e.g., 8×8 SDI and 8×8 AES within the same 2RU frame,
built and configured before shipping).
A power/alarm LED and a link LED are present on all control modules.
• The power/alarm LED is illuminated green when power is present. If the
power LED is not lit, one or more of the supply rails on the module is
invalid.
• The link LED is illuminated yellow when an Ethernet connection is made
and maintained.

Note
While the link LED is on each frame, it is active only on a frame
with an enhanced resource module for Ethernet communications.

The location of these LEDs is shown in Figure 1-3 on page 4 and Figure 1-4 on
page 4.
Core Routing Module (BP – Back Panel)

Figure 1-5. Core Routing Module

The core routing module (back panel) combines input, output, control, and
switching circuitry for base functionality. This architecture allows for reduced
component usage.

6 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Module Interconnect (MI)

Figure 1-6. Module Interconnect

The module interconnect (MI) provides communications, power conversion,


and reference conditioning for both the resource module and the core router
module. It also provides control connectivity between the resource module and
the core routing module. The MI monitors and controls the single relay alarm
for power loss, fan failure, or other alarms.

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 7
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Flash Memory Module

Figure 1-7. Flash Memory Module

The flash memory module houses the operating system software for Panacea
series products. It includes the software necessary for updating protocols.
Resource Module

Figure 1-8. Resource Module

8 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

The resource module provides control and monitoring communications; access


to the communication connectors (X-Y, serial, and Ethernet); reference timing
information; and gets necessary power through a connector to the MI module.
All control and monitoring to the core routing section of the core routing
module is through a “get and set” protocol using a parallel data and addressing
scheme. While advanced communications and associated control applications
will enable complete configuration, all configurable items are accessible
through the serial port interface.
A local or remote control panel can also be attached to either the standard
resource module or the enhanced resource module. (The P16SCQ/P16HSCQ
clean/quiet switch product has its own control panel, the R(PL)CP-32×8CQp.
See page 41 for more information about this control panel.)
The resource module is available in two options: standard and enhanced.
Standard Resource Module
The standard resource module provides basic switching, monitoring,
and configuring of each core routing module. This control is through a
non-specific protocol supporting physical destination to source routing
(port-to-port routing in some applications), partitioning, and simple
alarm monitoring. All information from each supported module is
available through the serial port.
Enhanced Resource Module
The enhanced resource module provides the same basic switching,
monitoring, and configuration that the standard resource module
provides, but with the addition of Ethernet connectivity and extended
control and monitoring features. Some of these features include
software partitioning, telnet, and real-time alarm/signal monitoring.
This control uses the same non-specific protocol supporting physical
destination to source routing, partitioning, and simple alarm monitoring
for core functionality. All information from each supported module will
still be available through the serial port, but further information will be
present to applications interfacing with the Ethernet domain.
The enhanced resource module can be installed at the manufacturing
facility; however, you can replace a standard resource module with an
enhanced resource module yourself, if desired. See Appendix G:
“Enhanced Resource Module Installation” for enhanced module
installation instructions.

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 9
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Power Supply Module


Desktop Power Supply Module

Figure 1-9. Single Desktop Power Supply Module (2RU Module


Shown)

Each Panacea router comes with a desktop power supply module as a


standard feature. The power supply module is equipped with a universal
input. The universal AC input version will operate from 100 VAC
through 240 VAC, which it converts to a 15V DC rail providing 70 W
(for 1RU) or 130 W (for 2RU) of output power. This will efficiently
support the core routing module, the standard, or the enhanced resource
module, and any control panel that may be present. Because all frames
have at least two power supply connectors, and because all necessary
current sharing components are located internally to the frame, all you
have to do is plug in a second desktop power supply for redundancy.
The Panacea desktop power supply module has a thermostatically
controlled cooling fan built into it. The cooling fan will turn on and off
automatically to control the power supply’s operating temperature.
Optional Power Supply Mounting Tray

Figure 1-10. Power Supply Mounting Tray

10 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

The Panacea product line includes an optional power supply mounting


tray, which allows you to mount up to seven 1RU desktop power
supplies or up to five 2RU desktop power supplies. You can mount a
combination of 1RU and 2RU power supplies on the same tray. This
power supply mounting tray can be forward- or rear-mounted into a
regular frame rack. You can install the power supply mounting tray
yourself, if desired. See Appendix H: “Power Supply Mounting Tray
Installation” for instructions.
Optional Integrated Power Supply Mounting Bracket
Assembly and Integrated Power Supply (AC or DC)

Figure 1-11. Integrated Power Supply Mounting Bracket


Assembly and Integrated Power Supplies (2RU Version Shown)

The integrated power supply mounting bracket assembly extends the


frame by attaching to the metalwork and aligning with the power
connector used for the desktop power supplies. It can house any
combination of the two available integrated power supplies (AC or
DC). These two separate power supplies are equipped with either
universal AC (90 VAC to 264 VAC) inputs or with DC (-42 VDC to -60
VDC) inputs. This allows you to have up to two1 integrated,
hot-swappable power supplies for mission-critical applications. The
power supply module will supply 105 W at 15 VDC. Usually, it will be
installed at the manufacturing facility; however, you can install or
replace the Power supply mounting bracket assembly and integrated
power supply yourself, if desired. (Installation instructions and
specifications are included as part of the power supply bracket
assembly package.)

1 Only
one integrated supply is available in a 1RU frame.

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 11
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Fan Module

Figure 1-12. Fan Module (1RU Fan Module Assembly Shown)

The fan module is only necessary in with certain formats (e.g., analog audio and
HS). It will be installed at the manufacturing facility; however, you can replace
the fan module yourself if desired. See Appendix I: “Fan Module Replacement”
for instructions.

12 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Control Features
The Panacea series modular routing switchers are compatible with all existing
Harris routers and control panels. Panacea frames include the following control
options:
• A standard serial port for communication to/from from computers and
automation systems (configurable for RS-232 or RS-422)
• One looping coaxial (X-Y) port for connecting to remote control panels and
other routers
• Support for up to 115K baud serial communications
• One loop-through port for the connection for a synchronization signal
• An Ethernet port (available with enhanced resource module only)
• A local control panel (LCP) option
• A software-based control system

Front Panel Options


A Panacea frame can be configured with any one of the following front panel
styles:
• A blank front with green power indicator LED (standard); the LED will be
illuminated if power is applied to frame (a link LED is also present, but only
enabled with enhanced Ethernet communications)
• An optional local control panel1
(Some Panacea front panel units do not have supporting hinges.
Consequently, if the front panel face plate is removed and not handled
properly, it can fall with sufficient force to dislocate and/or damage the
ribbon cable attached to the resource module connector. When removing the
front panel, hold the face plate firmly to ensure that it does not become
damaged.)
Figure 1-13 shows examples of the front panel options available for the 1RU
frame. Figure 1-14 shows an example of the front panel options available for the
1RU P16SCQ/P16HSCQ clean/quiet switch. Figure 1-15 shows examples of
the front panel options for the 2RU frame.

1 You
may use any Harris control panels except the ABAp panel series, 12×2HADESC2, and
32×8p. Additionally, the P16SCQ/P16HSCQ clean/quiet switch product has its own control
panel, the R(PL)CP-32X8CQp. Visit our Web site or see your dealer for more information about
the programmable panel series.

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 13
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Figure 1-13. 1RU Front Panel Options

Figure 1-14. 1RU P16SCQ/P16HSCQ Clean/Quiet Switch Front Panel


Options

Figure 1-15. 2RU Front Panel Options1

1 The
P16SCQ/P16HSCQ clean/quiet switch is not available as a 2RU model.

14 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Software-Based Control Systems


Configuration Modes
The Panacea standard module can be configured in these modes:
• DIP switch mode1 for basic matrix switching on the X-Y bus with Harris
protocol
• Program mode1 for using other protocols, matrix partitioning, non-typical
offsetting, or a variety of starting levels
The Panacea enhanced module can be configured in these modes:
• DIP switch mode for basic matrix switching on the X-Y bus with Harris
protocol
• Program mode for using other protocols, matrix partitioning, non-typical
offsetting, or a variety of starting levels
The enhanced module uses two sub-modes under Program mode: simple
partitioning mode2 and advanced partitioning mode2.
• Simple partitioning mode is used when customizing a Panacea router
using terminal commands.
• Advanced partitioning mode is used when customizing a Panacea router
using software such as RouterMapper.
These modes allow the Panacea to be a part of any signal routing system.
Configuration Utility
The configuration utility for programming the Panacea for operation is
RouterMapper™, an easy-to-use Windows®-based application for
programming RouterWorks®, other router frames, control panels, and the
Opus™ master controller.
Control Software
There are several options available to control your Panacea system:
• Navigator™, an application that allows you to easily create custom browser
pages that represent your network and its various environments around the
world.
• RouterWorks, a Windows®-based 32 bit control system. RouterWorks uses
a graphic user interface to improve the manageability and ease of use of the
control system.
For more information on installing your Panacea system, see Chapter 2. For
more information on configuring your Panacea system, see Chapter 3. For more
information on operating your Panacea system, see Chapter 4.

1
See page 92 for a more detailed explanation of DIP switch and Program modes.
2 See
page 56 for a more detailed explanation of simple and advanced partitioning modes.

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 15
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Panacea Module Information


The Panacea product line consists of expandable, modular routing switchers
with the capability to meet the multiple format signal switching requirements of
today’s market. Panacea routing switchers are available in these formats:
• Analog audio
• Analog video
• Standard definition/multirate
• Clean/quiet switch
• AES audio
Each module format is described below. Any specialized installation procedures
are described in Chapter 2. Any specialized configuration procedures are
described in Chapter 3. All module specification information is contained in
Chapter 7.
The Panacea product line is not designed for extensive field service. See
“Product Servicing” on page xi for the types of allowable field service changes.
Any other upgrades or modifications to this product, except for software
enhancements, must be done at the service center.

Analog Audio Routing Switchers


The Panacea analog audio routing switcher features high impedance (> 20KΩ)
or 600Ω balanced inputs, and 66Ω or 600Ω balanced outputs terminated using
standard DB-25 connectors in blocks of eight channels. While economical, the
Panacea analog audio router boasts many features found in more expensive
models, including professional audio quality specifications, stereo output signal
presence detection, loss of power alarms and GPI contact closure, a number of
different matrix sizes available in both 1RU and 2RU configurations, support
for married stereo or dual monaural breakaway control, and the ability to mix
different signal formats in the 2RU frame. See Table 1-2 on page 17 for a list of
the matrix options available for this Panacea product.

16 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Matrix Sizes
Table 1-2. Analog Audio Matrix Sizes
Matrix Size Functionality 1RU Frame 2RU Frame
8×8 Dual mono or married stereo Yes Yes
2×8 (DA) With auto-changeover Yes Yes
2×16 (DA) With auto-changeover Yes Yes
16×1 Dual mono or married stereo with four Yes Yes
copies of the output
16×4 Dual mono or married stereo Yes Yes
16×8 Dual mono or married stereo Yes Yes
16×16 Dual mono or married stereo Yes Yes
32×1 Dual mono or married stereo with four No Yes
copies of the output
32×4 Dual mono or married stereo No Yes
32×16 Dual mono or married stereo No Yes
32×32 Dual mono or married stereo No Yes

Major Components
Core Routing Module
The analog audio core routing module board contains a 16×16 (or a 32×32)
crosspoint matrix board, with a separate back panel PCB with the input
receivers, and output drivers. See page 6 for more information about the core
routing module.
Module Interconnect
The module interconnect provides communications, power conversion, and
reference conditioning for both the logic control module and the core router
module. It also provides control connectivity between the control module and
the core router module. This module monitors and controls the single relay
alarm for power loss or fan failure. The Alarm jumper, which sets the normally
open/normally closed operation of the alarm port, is located on the module
interconnect. See page 7 for more information about the module interconnect.
Back Panel
The analog audio back panel I/O modules use up to 16 D-Type 25-pin
connectors. Figure 1-16 on page 17 shows the back panel input modules for
analog audio sources.

Figure 1-16. Analog Audio Back Panel I/O Modules (P-16×16A2 shown)

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 17
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Monitoring and Control


The Panacea analog audio routing switcher can be monitored and controlled
through any one of various means. It can be controlled locally via the front
panel control option or remotely via serial, X-Y, or Ethernet with a variety of
software packages, including RouterWorks®, Navigator™, and Pilot™. The
various monitoring and control options provide a means to manage the
switching of video and/or audio signals through this product as well as
communicate the status of the input and output signals. The monitoring/alarm
capabilities of this product enable you to act accordingly as the result of an
alarm condition, should one arise. See page 63 for alarm configuration details.

Power Conversion and Distribution


The external power supply converts 100VAC through 240VAC to +15VDC,
which is then supplied to the MI module. The +15V is applied to DC-DC
converters on the P-A2-SB module, which will produce the +17V, +12V, +5V,
-17V, –12V, and –5V rails required by the core routing module.
A green LED on the front of the logic control module indicates that power is
present in the Panacea frame, but does not guarantee that all rails are present and
within required voltage limits.

Control and Communications


The logic interface circuit allows the Panacea analog audio routing switcher
module to communicate with the Panacea system controller. In addition to
addressing the crosspoint matrix, the logic interface circuit also provides the
system controller with information about the system status. Matrix size, module
type, firmware revision level, input signal presence, and other information is
provided to the system controller through the logic interface. Information about
the core routing module can be viewed with a terminal or computer connected
to the Panacea system controller via the serial port.

Signal Flow
Figure 1-17 on page 19 shows a signal flow diagram for the analog audio
routing switcher.

18 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Figure 1-17. Signal Flow Diagram of the Analog Audio Routing Switcher

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 19
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Configuration Information
The analog audio module requires no additional procedures for configuring DIP
switches and the alarm port beyond those described for frame configuration.
Frame DIP switch and alarm port configuration is described on page 62 – 68.
There are special configuration procedures for configuring the stereo
(“married)/dual mono (“independent”) matrix mode jumpers; see page 73 for
details.

Installation Information
All internal modules are installed at the manufacturing facility.

Special Instructions for Dual Matrix, Same-Signal Format Panacea Routing Switchers
Matrix Partitioning
Panacea dual matrix routing switchers with the same format (for example, two
16×16 stereo audio matrices in a single 2RU frame) will be partitioned from
larger Panacea back panel configurations prior to shipment. The two matrices
will be automatically assigned to levels 0 and 1. You can change the starting
level in Panacea routing switchers as follows:
• If your Panacea uses a standard resource card (P-RESL), the level setting
will always be consecutive for each matrix within the same frame. The
starting level setting can be changed via the SET FIRSTLEVEL terminal
command (see “SET FIRSTLEVEL” on page 158).
• If your Panacea uses an enhanced resource card (Ethernet-enabled
P-RESH), the levels can be “married” via the SET FIRSTLEVEL and SET
MPPARM terminal commands (see “SET FIRSTLEVEL” on page 178 and
“SET MPARM” on page 172).
Model Numbers and Descriptions
Table 1-3 provides the model numbers and descriptions for all analog audio dual
matrix, same-signal format Panacea routing switchers.

Table 1-3. Analog Audio Signal Formats


Model Number Description
P16×16A2A2xx 16×16 dual stereo audio routing switcher
P8×8A2A2xx 8×8 dual stereo audio routing switcher
P16×1A2A2xx 16×1 dual stereo audio routing switcher
P16×4A2A2xx 16×4 dual stereo audio routing switcher
P16×8A2A2xx 16×8 dual stereo audio routing switcher

20 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Analog Video Routing Switchers


Main Features
• Supports a wide bandwidth (greater than 200 MHz)
• Provides excellent video performance
• Allows minimum propagation delay
• Includes a wide range of applications (see Table 1-4)

Matrix Sizes
Table 1-4. Analog Video Matrix Sizes
Matrix Size 1RU frame 2RU frame
8×8 Yes Yes
16×1 Yes Yes
16×4 Yes Yes
16×8 Yes Yes
16×16 Yes Yes
32×1 No Yes
32×4 No Yes
32×8 No Yes
32×16 No Yes
32×32 No Yes

Major Components
Core Routing Module
The analog video core routing module board contains a 16×16 (or a 32×32)
crosspoint matrix, input receivers, and output drivers. See page 6 for more
information about the core routing module.
Module Interconnect
The module interconnect provides communications, power conversion, and
reference conditioning for both the logic control module and the core router
module. It also provides control connectivity between the control module and
the core router module. This module monitors and controls the single relay
alarm for power loss or fan failure. The Alarm jumper, which sets the normally
open/normally closed operation of the alarm port, is located on the module
interconnect. See page 7 for more information about the module interconnect.
Back Panel
The analog video back panel I/O modules use up to 32 BNC connectors for
inputs and up to 32 for outputs. These BNCs are positioned as shown
Figure 1-18 on page 22.

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 21
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Figure 1-18. Analog Video Back Panel I/O Module Pin Connectors (P-32×32V shown)

Signal Data Rate


Panacea analog video routing switchers are capable of switching composite and
component analog video RF, IF, and other signals within the amplitude and
bandwidth limitation.

Switching Point
The Panacea analog video routing switcher has a sync input on the rear panel. A
video reference signal can be fed to this module so that synchronous switching
can be achieved. It is possible for the user to set a variable time delay before the
switching is made so that critical switching will occur at the proper interval. The
sync signal can be NTSC or PAL.

Monitoring and Control


The Panacea analog video routing switcher can be monitored and controlled
through any one of various means. It can be controlled locally via the front
panel control option or remotely via serial, X-Y, or Ethernet with a variety of
software packages, including RouterWorks®, Navigator™, and Pilot™. The
various monitoring and control options provide a means to manage the
switching of video and/or audio signals through this product as well as
communicate the status of the input and output signals. The monitoring/alarm
capabilities of this product enable you to act accordingly as the result of an
alarm condition, should one arise. See page 63 for alarm configuration details.

Power Conversion and Distribution


The external power supply converts 100VAC through 240VAC to +15VDC,
which is then supplied to the MI module. The +15V is applied to DC-DC
converters, which will produce the +5V and +3.3V rails required by the core
routing module.
A green LED on the front of the logic control module indicates that power is
present in the Panacea frame, but does not guarantee that all rails are present and
within required voltage limits.

22 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Control and Communications


The logic interface circuit allows the Panacea analog video routing switcher
module to communicate with the Panacea system controller. In addition to
addressing the crosspoint matrix, the logic interface circuit also provides the
system controller with information about the system status. Matrix size, module
type, firmware revision level, input signal presence, and other information is
provided to the system controller through the logic interface. Information about
the core routing module can be viewed with a terminal or computer connected
to the Panacea system controller via the serial port.

Signal Path
Each signal path consists of an input buffer, crosspoint matrix, and output
drivers. The input buffer provides an excellent return loss. The 16×16 analog
video crosspoint IC supplies the matrix (single in 1RU, 4 in 2RU). The driver
amplifier delivers analog video to a 75Ω coaxial cable.

Signal Flow
Figure 1-19 shows a signal flow diagram for the analog video routing switcher.

Figure 1-19. Signal Flow Diagram of the Analog Video Routing Switcher

Configuration Information
The analog video module requires no additional procedures for configuring DIP
switches and the alarm port beyond those described for frame configuration.
Frame DIP switch and alarm port configuration is described on page 62 – 68.

Installation Information
All internal modules are installed at the manufacturing facility.

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 23
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Special Instructions for Dual Matrix, Same-Signal Format Panacea Routing Switchers
Matrix Partitioning
Panacea dual matrix routing switchers with the same format (for example, two
16×16 analog video matrices in a single 2RU frame) will be partitioned from
larger Panacea back panel configurations prior to shipment. The two matrices
will be automatically assigned to levels 0 and 1. You can change the starting
level in Panacea routing switchers as follows:
• If your Panacea uses a standard resource card (P-RESL), the level setting
will always be consecutive for each matrix within the same frame. The
starting level setting can be changed via the SET FIRSTLEVEL terminal
command (see “SET FIRSTLEVEL” on page 158).
• If your Panacea uses an enhanced resource card (Ethernet-enabled
P-RESH), the levels can be “married” via the SET FIRSTLEVEL and SET
MPPARM terminal commands (see “SET FIRSTLEVEL” on page 178 and
“SET MPARM” on page 172).
Model Numbers and Descriptions
Table 1-5 provides the model numbers and descriptions for all analog video dual
matrix, same-signal format Panacea routing switchers.

Table 1-5. Analog Video Signal Formats


Model Number Description
P16×16VVxx 16×16 dual analog video routing switcher
P8×8VVxx 8×8 dual analog video routing switcher
P16×1VVxx 16×1 dual analog video routing switcher
P16×4VVxx 16×4 dual analog video routing switcher
P16×8VVxx 16×8 dual analog video routing switcher

Serial Digital Video Routing Switchers (3 Gb/HS/S/R)


The Panacea multirate and standard definition serial digital video routing
switcher is available with clean switch and reclocking options. You can
determine the format by the way the router part number is configured:
• 3 Gb serial digital video routing switchers include an “3Gb/s” sticker next
to the part number (e.g., P16×16HSI 3Gb/s)
• Multirate serial digital video routing switchers include an “HS” suffix in the
part number (e.g., P8×8HS)
• Standard definition serial digital video routing switchers include an “S”
suffix in the part number (e.g., P8×8S)
• 3 Gb, multirate, or standard definition serial digital video routing switchers
with a reclocking option include an “R” suffix in the part number
(P16×1HSR; P16×1SR; P16×16HSR 3Gb/s)

24 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

The 3 Gb/HS/S/R serial digital video routing switcher can accommodate an


external sync input on the rear panel so that synchronous switching can be
achieved. The sync signal can be NTSC or PAL.
The 3 Gb/HS/S/R can be monitored and controlled locally or remotely.
• It can be controlled locally via the front panel control option.
• It can be controlled remotely via serial, Harris X-Y coax control, or
Ethernet.
The 3 Gb/HS/S/R is capable of operating on a range of all SMPTE-defined
standard and high definition data rates. See Table 1-9 on page 33 for a list of
data rates for 3 Gb/HS/S/R serial digital video routing switchers
The 3 Gb/HS/S/R is offered in a one-rack unit (1RU) and a two-rack unit (2RU)
frame. (For those applications that require larger matrices, consider using the
Integrator Series routing switcher system.) The supported matrix sizes are listed
in Table 1-7 on page 28 and Table 1-6 on page 27.
Multiple copies of the output(s) are available on some matrix options. For
example, in a 1RU, you can select a 16×4 to operate as a normal 16×4, as a
16×2 with dual outputs, or as a 16×1 with quad outputs. Similarly, in the 2RU
frame, you can select a 32×4 to operate as a normal 32×4, as a 32×2 with dual
outputs, or as a 32×1 with quad outputs.

Submatrices, Separate Mode, and Married Mode


You can partition 3 Gb/HS/S/Rs into smaller submatrices. For example, you can
partition a 32×4 into two 16×2s, four 8×1s, dual 32×2s, or quad 32×1s. When
you partition a routing matrix, you can also select the submatrices to function as
separate or married units.
• When you set the submatrices to perform in separate mode, the individual
submatrices are operated and controlled as smaller, separate routers.
• When you set the submatrices to perform in married mode, the individual
submatrices operate in unison. This means when an input or output is
selected on any one of the submatrices, the corresponding input or output is
selected on all submatrices. This mode of operation can be very convenient
when routing component video, for example. It is also possible to mix and
match signal formats. This way, a video matrix and an audio matrix can be
housed in the same frame. Multiformat configurations can only be achieved
in a 2RU frame. When configured as a multiformat product the maximum
matrix size for each format is 32×4.

Main Features
• High quality multirate and standard definition serial digital video routing
with enhanced control and monitoring capabilities
• Reclocking available as an option
• Multi-format matrix configurations
• Supported signal types (270 Mb/s to 2.97 Gb/s):
• SMPTE 259M - 143, 177, 270, and 360 Mb/s

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 25
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

• SMPTE 344M - 540 Mb/s


• SMPTE 292M - 1.485 Gb/s
• SMPTE 424M - 2.97 Gb/s
• Standards of operation
• 525 60/1.001
• 625 50
• 720p 60/1.001
• 720p 60
• 1080i 50
• 1080i 60/1.001
• 1080i 60
• 1080p 30/1.001
• 1080p 60/1.001
• (HS/S) Reclock SMPTE 259M, SMPTE 344M, and SMPTE 292M bit rates
• (3 Gb) Reclock 270 Mb/s, 1.485 Gb/s, and 2.97 Gb/s bit rates
• Bypass operation for signals at non-traditional video rates
• Auto equalize all inputs up to 2.97 Gb/s
• BOS/Pilot integrated control capabilities
• Remote control via Ethernet (available with enhanced module only)
• Remote monitoring and configuration
• NTSC/PAL/HD analog reference acceptable for switching
• High quality wideband video routing with enhanced control and monitoring
capabilities

26 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Matrix Sizes
Table 1-6. Standard Definition (S) Matrix Sizes
Name Reference Configurable as
P8×8S 8×8 standard serial digital video router 8×8
2-4×4
4-2×2
P8×8SR 8×8 standard serial digital video router with reclocking 8×8
2-4×4
4-2×2
P16×1S 16×1 standard serial digital video router 16×1
P16×1SR 16×1 standard serial digital video router with reclocking 16×1
P16×4S 16×4 standard serial digital video router 16×4
2-8×2
4-4×1
16×2 (dual output)
16×1 (quad output)
P16×4SR 16×4 standard serial digital video router with reclocking 16×4
2-8×2
4-4×1
16×2 (dual output)
P16×8S 16×8 standard serial digital video router 16×8
2-8×4
4-4×2
8-2×1
P16×8SR 16×8 standard serial digital video router with reclocking 16×8
2-8×4
4-4×2
8-2×1
P16×16S 16×16 standard serial digital video router 16×16
2-8×8
4-4×4
8-2×2
P16×16SR 16×16 standard serial digital video router with reclocking 16×16
2-8×8
4-4×4
8-2×2
P32×1S 32×1 standard serial digital video router 32×1
P32×1SR 32×1 standard serial digital video router with reclocking 32×1
P32×4S 32×4 standard serial digital video router 32×4
2-16×2
4-8×1
32×2 (dual output)
32×1 (quad output)

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 27
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Table 1-6. Standard Definition (S) Matrix Sizes (Continued)


Name Reference Configurable as
P32×4SR 32×4 standard serial digital video router with reclocking 32×4
2-16×2
4-8×1
32×2 (dual output)
32×1 (quad output)
P32×8S 32×8 standard serial digital video router 32×8
2-16×4
4-8×2
8-4×1
P32×8SR 32×8 standard serial digital video router with reclocking 32×8
2-16×4
4-8×2
8-4×1
P32×16S 32×16 standard serial digital video router 32×16
2-16×8
4-8×4
8-4×2
16-2×1
P32×16SR 32×16 standard serial digital video router with reclocking 32×16
2-16×8
4-8×4
8-4×2
16-2×1
P32×32S 32×32 standard serial digital video router 32×32
2-16×16
4-8×8
8-4×4
16-2×2
P32×32SR 32×32 standard serial digital video router with reclocking 32×32
2-16×16
4-8×8
8-4×4
16-2×2

Table 1-7. Multirate (HS) Matrix Sizes


Name Reference Configurable as
P8×8HS 8×8 multirate serial digital video router 8×8
2-4×4
4-2×2
P8×8HSR 8×8 multirate serial digital video router with reclocking 8×8
2-4×4
4-2×2
P16×1HS 16×1 multirate serial digital video router 16×1
P16×1HSR 16×1 multirate serial digital video router with reclocking 16×1

28 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Table 1-7. Multirate (HS) Matrix Sizes (Continued)


Name Reference Configurable as
P16×4HS 16×4 multirate serial digital video router 16×4
2-8×2
4-4×1
16×2 (dual output)
16×1 (quad output)
P16×4HSR 16×4 multirate serial digital video router with reclocking 16×4
2-8×2
4-4×1
16×2 (dual output)
16×1 (quad output)
P16×8HS 16×8 multirate serial digital video router 16×8
2-8×4
4-4×2
8-2×1
P16×8HSR 16×8 multirate serial digital video router with reclocking 16×8
2-8×4
4-4×2
8-2×1
P16×16HS 16×16 multirate serial digital video router 16×16
2-8×8
4-4×4
8-2×2
P16×16HSR 16×16 multirate serial digital video router with reclocking 16×16
2-8×8
4-4×4
8-2×2
P32×1HS 32×1 multirate serial digital video router 32×1
P32×1HSR 32×1 multirate serial digital video router with reclocking 32×1
P32×4HS 32×4 multirate serial digital video router 32×4
2-16×2
4-8×1
32×2 (dual output)
32×1 (quad output)
P32×4HSR 32×4 multirate serial digital video router with reclocking 32×4
2-16×2
4-8×1
32×2 (dual output)
32×1 (quad output)
P32×8HS 32×8 multirate serial digital video router 32×8
2-16×4
4-8×2
8-4×1

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 29
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Table 1-7. Multirate (HS) Matrix Sizes (Continued)


Name Reference Configurable as
P32×8HSR 32×8 multirate serial digital video router with reclocking 32×8
2-16×4
4-8×2
8-4×1
P32×16HS 32×16 multirate serial digital video router 32×16
2-16×8
4-8×4
8-4×2
16-2×1
P32×16HSR 32×16 multirate serial digital video router with reclocking 32×16
2-16×8
4-8×4
8-4×2
16-2×1
P32×32HS 32×32 multirate serial digital video router 32×32
2-16×16
4-8×8
8-4×4
16-2×2
P32×32HSR 32×32 multirate serial digital video router with reclocking 32×32
2-16×16
4-8×8
8-4×4
16-2×2

Table 1-8. Multirate (3 Gb) Matrix Sizes


Name Reference Configurable as
P8×8HS 3Gb/s 8×8 multirate serial digital video router 8×8
2-4×4
4-2×2
P8×8HSR 3Gb/s 8×8 multirate serial digital video router with reclocking 8×8
2-4×4
4-2×2
P16×4HS 3Gb/s 16×4 multirate serial digital video router 16×4
2-8×2
4-4×1
16×2 (dual output)
16×1 (quad output)
P16×4HSR 3Gb/s 16×4 multirate serial digital video router with reclocking 16×4
2-8×2
4-4×1
16×2 (dual output)
16×1 (quad output)

30 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Table 1-8. Multirate (3 Gb) Matrix Sizes (Continued)


Name Reference Configurable as
P16×16HS 3Gb/s 16×16 multirate serial digital video router 16×16
2-8×8
4-4×4
8-2×2
P16×16HSR 3Gb/s 16×16 multirate serial digital video router with reclocking 16×16
2-8×8
4-4×4
8-2×2
P32×4HS 3Gb/s 32×4 multirate serial digital video router 32×4
2-16×2
4-8×1
32×2 (dual output)
32×1 (quad output)
P32×4HSR 3Gb/s 32×4 multirate serial digital video router with reclocking 32×4
2-16×2
4-8×1
32×2 (dual output)
32×1 (quad output)
P32×32HS 3Gb/s 32×32 multirate serial digital video router 32×32
2-16×16
4-8×8
8-4×4
16-2×2
P32×32HSR 3Gb/s 32×32 multirate serial digital video router with reclocking 32×32
2-16×16
4-8×8
8-4×4
16-2×2

Major Components
Core Routing Module
The 3 Gb/HS/S/R serial digital video routing switcher supports SMPTE 259M
and SMPTE 344M for standard definition signal formats; SMPTE 292M for
720p or 1080i high definition signal formats; and SMPTE 424M for 1080p high
definition signal formats. The module contains a 16×16 (or a 32×32) crosspoint
matrix. Reclocking is automatic for all standard definition and high definition
clock rates in units that contain the optional reclocking submodule. The system
controller automatically detects the presence, position, and matrix size of each
module. See page 6 for more information about the core routing module.
Input Equalization
The back panel I/O and crosspoint module offers automatic input equalization.
There is one cable equalizer IC for each BNC input. The equalizer circuit
automatically compensates for cable loss and provides a differential signal that
is routed to the crosspoint IC. The equalizer IC can automatically recover a 3
Gb signal from up to 328 ft (100 m); a high definition signal from up to 360 ft

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 31
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

(110 m) or a standard definition signal from up to 1100 ft (335 m) of Belden


1694 cable (minimum). Longer cable runs may be possible over cable types
with lower losses.
Output Driver
The output driver delivers serial digital video data to a 75Ω coaxial cable and
controls the slew rate into the required range.
Module Interconnect
The module interconnect provides communications, power conversion, and
reference conditioning for both the logic control module and the core router
module. It also provides control connectivity between the control module and
the core router module. This module monitors and controls the single relay
alarm for power loss or fan failure. The Alarm jumper, which sets the normally
open/normally closed operation of the alarm port, is located on the module
interconnect. See page 7 for more information about the module interconnect.
Back Panel
The back panel I/O module has 8, 16, or 32 equalizers; and 1, 4, 8, 16, or 32
output drivers, depending on the desired configuration. Each input and output
cell is connected to a coaxial cable through on-board BNC connectors. This
interface module is mounted to the back of the Panacea frame to allow
interfacing to other broadcast equipment.

Figure 1-20. Back Panel I/O Module Connectors (P-32×32HS shown)

Reclocking Submodule (Optional)


Reclocking Submodule1
The Panacea 3 Gb/HS/S/R serial digital video routing switcher is capable of
sensing and reclocking all SMPTE-defined standard and high definition data
rates. These rates include 1432, 1772, 270, 3602, 5402 Mb/s; and 1.485 and 2.97
Gb/s. If the module does not recognize the data rate of the input signal, it will
automatically go into “bypass” mode and output the input signal without
reclocking. If desired, the user may set this module to “bypass” mode, where it
will route any of the input signals to the output(s) without reclocking, regardless
of the data rate of the input signal.

1
The P-32×32HS/S uses two reclocking submodules.
2 In
pass-thru mode for 3 Gb

32 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Data Rates
The 3 Gb/HS/S/R is capable of sensing, switching, and reclocking all
SMPTE-defined standard and high definition data rates. (See Table 1-9 for the
data rates supported by each format.) If the module does not recognize the data
rate of the input signal, it will automatically go into Bypass mode and route the
input signal without reclocking. If desired, you may set this module to Bypass
mode where it will route any of the input signals to the output(s) without
reclocking, regardless of the data rate of the input signal.

Table 1-9. Data Rates for 3 Gb, High Definition (HS) and Standard
Definition (S) Serial Digital Video Routing Switchers
Data Rate 3 Gb Serial Digital High Definition (HS) Standard Definition
Video Routing Digital Video (S) Digital Video
Switcher Routing Switcher Routing Switcher
143 Mb/s2 • • •
177 Mb/s2 • • •
270 Mb/s • • •
360 Mb/s2 • • •
540 Mb/s2 • • •
1.485 Gb/s • •
2.977 Gb/s •

Sync Input Signal


The 3 Gb/HS/S/R has a sync input on the rear panel. A video reference signal
can be fed to this module so that synchronous switching can be achieved. (It is
possible for the user to set a variable time delay before the switch is made so
that critical switching will occur at the proper interval.) The sync signal can be
NTSC, PAL, or trilevel.

Monitoring and Control


The 3 Gb/HS/S/R can be monitored and controlled through any one of various
means. It can be controlled locally via the front panel control option or remotely
via serial, X-Y, or Ethernet with a variety of software packages, including
RouterWorks®, Navigator™, and Pilot™. The various monitoring and control
options provide a means to manage the switching of video and/or audio signals
through this product as well as communicate the status of the input and output
signals. The monitoring/alarm capabilities of this product enable you to act
accordingly as the result of an alarm condition, should one arise. See page 63
for alarm configuration details.

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 33
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Power Conversion and Distribution


The Panacea external power supply converts 100VAC through 240VAC to
+15VDC, which is then supplied to the MI module. The +15V is applied to
DC-DC converters, which will produce the +5V and +3.3V rails required by the
core routing module.
A green LED on the front of the logic control module indicates that power is
present in the Panacea frame, but does not guarantee that all rails are present and
within required voltage limits.
A soft start circuit is provided to minimize the rush circuit during power-up.

Control and Communications


The logic interface circuit allows the Panacea serial digital video routing
switcher module to communicate with the Panacea system controller. In
addition to addressing the crosspoint matrix, the logic interface circuit also
provides the system controller with information about the system status. Matrix
size, module type, firmware revision level, input signal presence, and other
information is provided to the system controller through the logic interface.
Information about the core routing module can be viewed with a terminal or
computer connected to the Panacea system controller via the serial port.

Signal Flow
Figure 1-22 is a signal flow diagram of the serial digital video routing switcher.

34 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Figure 1-21. Signal Flow Diagram of 3 Gb/HS/S/R Routers

Configuration Information
The 3 Gb/HS/S/R module requires no additional procedures for configuring DIP
switches and the alarm port beyond those described for frame configuration.
Frame DIP switch and alarm port configuration is described on page 62 – 68.

Installation Information
All internal modules are installed at the manufacturing facility.

Special Instructions for Dual Matrix, Same-Signal Format Panacea Routing Switchers
Matrix Partitioning
Panacea dual matrix routing switchers with the same format (for example, two
16×16 HD and SDI matrices in a single 2RU frame) will be partitioned from
larger Panacea back panel configurations prior to shipment. The two matrices
will be automatically assigned to levels 0 and 1. You can change the starting
level in Panacea routing switchers as follows:

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 35
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

• If your Panacea uses a standard resource card (P-RESL), the level setting
will always be consecutive for each matrix within the same frame. The
starting level setting can be changed via the SET FIRSTLEVEL terminal
command (see “SET FIRSTLEVEL” on page 158).
• If your Panacea uses an enhanced resource card (Ethernet-enabled
P-RESH), the levels can be “married” via the SET FIRSTLEVEL and SET
MPPARM terminal commands (see “SET FIRSTLEVEL” on page 178 and
“SET MPARM” on page 172).
Model Numbers and Descriptions
Table 1-10 provides the model numbers and descriptions for all 3 Gb/HS/S/R
dual matrix, same-signal format Panacea routing switchers.

Table 1-10. HS/S Signal Formats


Model Number Description
P16×16HSHSxx 16×16 dual HD & SDI routing switcher
P8×8HSHSxx 8×8 dual HD & SDI routing switcher
P16×1HSHSxx* 16×1 dual HD & SDI routing switcher
P16×4HSHSxx 16×4 dual HD & SDI routing switcher
P16×8HSHSxx* 16×8 dual HD & SDI routing switcher
* Not available for 3 Gb

Table 1-11. S Signal Formats


Model Number Description
P16×16SSxx 16×16 dual SDI routing switcher
P8×8SSxx 8×8 dual SDI routing switcher
P16×1SSxx 16×1 dual SDI routing switcher
P16×4SSxx 16×4 dual SDI routing switcher
P16×8SSxx 16×8 dual SDI routing switcher

36 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Clean/Quiet Switch Routing Switchers (P16SCQ/P16HSCQ)


The Panacea clean/quiet switch offers clean HD-SDI and/or SDI video routing
with quiet embedded audio routing by ensuring that all source changes occur
without any glitches or audible artifacts. The Panacea clean/quiet switch
combines power and ease of use to provide an excellent master control backup
or direct-to-tape router; it is available with 16 inputs and 8 outputs (2 clean
outputs and 6 auxiliary outputs). In addition, five transition choices have been
added to provide flexible and smooth changes between source materials.
• The P16SCQ is capable of operating on a range of all SMPTE-defined
standard data rates. See Table 1-13 on page 40 for the data rates supported
by the P16SCQ.
• The P16HSCQ is capable of operating on a range of all SMPTE-defined
data rates. See Table 1-13 on page 40 for the data rates supported by the
P16HSCQ.
The P16SCQ/P16HSCQ router requires an external sync input on the rear panel
so that synchronous switching can be achieved. The sync signal can be NTSC,
PAL or trilevel (1080i 50/59.9/60 or 720p 59.9/60).
The P16SCQ/P16HSCQ can be monitored and controlled locally or remotely.
• It can be controlled locally via the PLCP-32×8CQp control panel option.
• It can be controlled remotely via the RCP-32×8CQp control panel, serial,
Harris X-Y coax control, or Ethernet.
P16SCQ and PH16SCQ modules are offered in a one-rack unit (1RU) frame.
The supported matrix sizes are listed in Table 1-12 on page 38.

Submatrices, Independent Mode, and Married Mode


You can partition P16SCQ/P16HSCQ matrices into smaller submatrices to
allow for simultaneous SD and HD clean/quiet switching. For example, you can
partition a P16HSCQ into two 8×4s. When you partition a routing matrix, you
can also select the submatrices to function as separate or married units.
• When you set the submatrices to perform in separate mode, the individual
submatrices are operated and controlled as smaller, separate routers on
separate control levels.
• When you set the submatrices to perform in married mode, the individual
submatrices operate in unison and on the same control level. This means
when an input or output is selected on any one of the submatrices, the
corresponding input or output is selected on all submatrices. This mode of
operation can be very convenient when mixing and matching signal
formats. This way, an SD video matrix and an HD video matrix can be
housed in the same frame.

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 37
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Matrix Sizes
Table 1-12. Clean/Quiet Switch Matrix Sizes
Name Reference Configurable as
P16SCQ 16×2 standard serial digital video router 16×2 clean/quiet with
with clean switch and embedded audio 6 aux outputs
quiet switch with 6 aux. (non-clean,
non-reclocking) outputs
P16HSCQ 16×2 multirate serial digital video 16×2 clean/quiet with
router with clean switch and embedded 6 aux outputs
audio quiet switch with 6 aux.
(non-clean, non-reclocking) outputs

Main Features
• A 1RU, or two 1RU clean switch routers in a 2RU Panacea frame
• Input/output and crosspoint module/back panel
• Multi-format matrix configurations
• Power conversion and distribution, sync separation, and communication
interconnect
• Reclocker/retime submodule (clean switch) for two clean outputs
• Six additional aux outputs that are not clean or reclocked for monitoring or
aux uses
• Control and communications submodule
• External power supply
• Optional local or remote control panel
• Control via local or remote panel, RS-232/RS-422, X-Y, or IP/Ethernet
P16SCQ-Specific Features
• High quality SQ digital video routing with enhanced control and monitoring
capabilities.
• Supported signal types SMPTE 259M -270Mb/s
• Standards of operation1
• 525/59.9
• 625/50
• Reclock SMPTE 259M bit rates (220 Mb/s)
• Auto equalize all inputs up to 540 Mb/s (only switch 270 Mb/s cleanly)
• NTSC/PAL/trilevel reference are acceptable for switching
P16HSCQ-Specific Features
• High quality HSQ/SQ digital video routing with enhanced control and
monitoring capabilities.

1 Other
standards using the same data rate will be passed but switching may not be clean.

38 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

• Supported signal types


• SMPTE 259M -270Mb/s
• SMPTE 292M - 1.485 Gb/s
• Standards of operation1
• 525 60/1.001
• 625 50
• 1080i 50
• 1080i 60/1.001
• 1080i 60
• 720p 60/1.001
• 720p 60
• Reclock both SMPTE 259M and SMPTE 292M bit rates
• Auto equalize all inputs up to 1.5 Gb/s
• Control via local or remote panel, RS-232/RS-422, X-Y, or IP/Ethernet
• NTSC/PAL/trilevel reference are acceptable for switching (60 Hz operation
requires a HD reference)

Major Components
Core Routing Module
The P16SCQ is designed to handle SMPTE 259M for standard definition signal
formats, and the P16HSCQ is designed to handle SMPTE 259M and SMPTE
292M for 720p or 1080i high definition signal formats. The system controller
automatically detects the presence, position, and matrix size of each module.
See page 6 for more information about the core routing module.
Input Equalization
The back panel I/O and crosspoint module offers automatic input equalization.
There is one cable equalizer IC for each BNC input. The equalizer circuit
automatically compensates for cable loss and provides a differential signal that
is routed to the crosspoint IC. The equalizer IC can automatically recover a high
definition signal from up to 360 ft (110 m) or a standard definition signal from
up to 1100 ft (335 m) of Belden 1694 cable (minimum). Longer cable runs may
be possible over cable types with lower losses.
Crosspoint Matrix
The basic module is a crosspoint matrix, used to provide two dual, clean outputs
to the clean switch module. This provides the “Program1” (PGM1) and
“Program2” (PGM2) busses for the two outputs of the product.
In addition, the crosspoint matrix provides six auxiliary outputs to the output
panel without reclocking, for monitoring and auxiliary uses.

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 39
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Output Driver
The output driver delivers serial digital video data to a 75Ω coaxial cable and
controls the slew rate into the required range. (Slew rate settings are applicable
to aux outputs only.)
Module Interconnect
The module interconnect (MI) provides communications, power conversion,
and reference conditioning for both the logic control module and the core router
module. It also provides control connectivity between the control module and
the core router module. This module monitors and controls the single relay
alarm for power loss or fan failure. The Alarm jumper, which sets the normally
open/normally closed operation of the alarm port, is located on the module
interconnect. See page 7 for more information about the module interconnect.
Back Panel I/O Module
The back panel I/O module has 16 input equalizers and output drivers. Each
input and output cell is connected to a coaxial cable through on-board BNC
connectors. This interface module is mounted to the back of the Panacea frame
to allow interfacing to other broadcast equipment.

Data Rates
The P16SCQ/P16HSCQ is capable of sensing, switching, and reclocking all
SMPTE-defined standard and high definition data rates on the two clean/quiet
outputs. (See Table 1-13 for the data rates supported by each format.)

Table 1-13. Data Rates for Standard Definition (P16SCQ) and High
Definition (P16HSCQ) Clean/Quiet Switch Routing Switchers
Routing Switcher Format Frame Rate
P16SCQ 270 MB/s 525/59.9 Hz
625/50 Hz
P16HSCQ 270 MB/s 525/59.9 Hz
625/50 Hz
1.485 Gb 720p/59.9 Hz
720p/60 Hz
1080i/50 Hz
1080i/59.9Hz
1080i/60 Hz

Sync Input Signal


The P16SCQ/P16HSCQ has a sync input on the rear panel. A video reference
signal can be fed to this module so that synchronous switching can be achieved.
The sync signal can be NTSC, PAL, or trilevel.

40 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Monitoring and Control


The P16SCQ/P16HSCQ can be monitored and controlled through any one of
various means. It can be controlled locally via the front panel control option or
remotely via serial, X-Y, or Ethernet with a variety of software packages
including RouterWorks®, Navigator™, and Pilot™. The various monitoring and
control options provide a means to manage the switching of video and/or
embedded audio signals through this product as well as communicate the status
of the input and output signals. The monitoring/alarm capabilities of this
product enable you to act accordingly as the result of an alarm condition, should
one arise. See page 63 for alarm configuration details.

Power Conversion and Distribution


The Panacea external power supply converts 100VAC through 240VAC to
+15VDC, which is then supplied to the MI module. The +15V is applied to
DC-DC converters, which will produce the +5V and +3.3V rails required by the
core routing module.
A green LED on the front of the logic control module indicates that power is
present in the Panacea frame, but does not guarantee that all rails are present and
within required voltage limits.
A soft start circuit is provided to minimize the rush circuit during power-up.

Control Panel
The optional R(PL)CP-32X8CQp control panel has 32 source buttons and 8
destination buttons. It is available in both a local and a remote control version.
A variety of video transitions with variable transition rates are available through
the control panel, including crossfade, “V” fade, cut-fade, fade-cut, and cut. The
fade rate of the transitions can be configured for full customization (as either
fast or slow) for control panel access to transition duration. The configuration of
the fast and slow transition duration is set in video frame lengths through
RouterMapper. See the PLCP32×8CQp/RCP-32×8CQP Control Panel
Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual for more information about
the clean/quiet switch remote control panel.

Signal Flow
Figure 1-22 is a signal flow diagram of the P16SCQ/P16HSCQ clean switch
serial digital video routing switcher.

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 41
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Figure 1-22. Signal Flow Diagram of P16SCQ/P16HSCQ Clean Switch


Serial Digital Video Routers

Configuration Information
The clean/quiet switch module requires no additional procedures for
configuring DIP switches and the alarm port beyond those described for frame
configuration. Frame DIP switch and alarm port configuration is described on
page 62 – 68. There are special configuration procedures for setting up the clean
switch; see page 77 – 86 for details.
The clean/quiet switch module operates in Program mode only. See page 92 for
more information about Program mode.

Installation Information
All internal modules are installed at the manufacturing facility.

42 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Serial Digital (AES) Audio Routing Switchers


The Panacea AES audio routing switcher is an AES-EBU digital audio routing
switcher module. The AES audio routing switcher features 75Ω BNC
input/output interfaces for digital audio installations wired using standard 75Ω
coaxial cable, as well as 110Ω DB-25 I/O interfaces for installations wired
using shielded, twisted pair cables. It is one of many I/O modules available for
use with the Panacea routing system.

P-04Q Submodule Option


The P-04Q is an optional submodule that mounts onto Panacea AES matrix
modules to improve the quality of the switch on the first four outputs. The
P-04Q eliminates loss of lock in downstream equipment by providing a
continuous output. Rather than simply switch the signals, it switches the
Samples used to produce the output stream. The outputs are reclocked and
realigned to conform to AES-11. Jitter is not passed from input to output; rather,
jitter on the output depends on the jitter on the reference signal. This option also
improves the audible quality of the switch by performing a cross-fade from the
initial source to the final source. The cross-fade may be enabled or disabled.
The P-04Q is only operational with a DARS reference.
AES Switching Fundamentals
An AES signal is a data stream which carries digitized audio samples for two
channels of audio. The smallest element in the AES stream is known as an AES
frame. Each frame carries a single sample from each of the two channels A (left)
and B (right).
There are three options for switching AES digital audio: asynchronous,
synchronous, and cross-fade. Each method has its advantages and
disadvantages, as described in the following sections.
Asynchronous Switching
Asynchronous switching is the simplest and most economical form of
AES routing. In an asynchronous router, switching occurs with no
consideration for AES framing. An asynchronous router does not
process or buffer the incoming signals. Crosspoints will switch as soon
as requested, usually at the same time as a video switcher in an
associated level.
Because the switch is not timed to occur on an AES frame boundary, the
switch corrupts at least one AES sample in the output stream. The
corrupted sample will cause downstream devices (devices that accept
the output of the router) to temporarily lose lock which may cause a
pop. Asynchronous switching is only recommended in environments
where switches are not performed live and where the downstream
devices can handle framing errors gracefully.

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 43
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Synchronous Switching
A synchronous router provides input buffering and special timing
control circuitry so that switching between two sources occurs on an
AES frame boundary. The timing buffers are used to frame align all
incoming signals. The timing control circuitry delays the requested
switch until the next AES frame boundary, thus ensuring that no
samples are corrupted. The output signal never loses framing, ensuring
that downstream equipment will not lose lock.
Synchronous routers, however, may still cause a pop if the level of the
two signals being switched does not match near the switch point.
Synchronous routers typically cost 50% more than an equivalently
sized asynchronous router. Manufacturers of synchronous routers have
for many years been promoting the synchronous router as a quiet
switch. It is important to note that, although a synchronous router
produces uncorrupted output streams, it does not guarantee quiet,
pop-free switching.
Synchronous and Quiet Switching Through the Use of
Cross-Fade Processing
To guarantee a quiet switch, additional processing of the AES signal is
required. The Synchronous Quiet Switch (SQS) combines
frame-aligned switching with cross-fade processing to guarantee a
synchronous, quiet, pop-free switch.
As shown in Figure 1-23 and Figure 1-24 on page 45, the SQS uses
timing buffers to align the two data streams for frame-aligned,
synchronous switching. The Cross-Fade mixer gradually reduces the
amplitude of the previously connected signal as it simultaneously
increases the amplitude of the new signal being selected. During this
cross-fade portion of the switch, the output of the switcher is a
combination, or “mix,” of the previous and new selections.

Figure 1-23. SQS Signal Flow Diagram

44 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

The top portion of Figure 1-24 shows how a simple synchronous switch
would have created a pop due to amplitude and phase differences in the
previous and new selections. The bottom portion of Figure 1-24 shows
how the crossfade mixer in the SQS manipulates the amplitudes of the
two signals over a short period of time, and how the resulting “mixed”
output is free of pop-causing transients. The effect is that the actual
switch occurs over an extended period of time, as determined by the
fade duration. You can select the cross-fade duration (selection ranges
from 5.5 mSec to 500 mSec).

Figure 1-24. Mixed Output of the SQS

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 45
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Main Features
The Panacea family of routers is housed in one of two frame sizes: 1RU and
2RU. The supported AES audio matrix sizes are listed in Table 1-14. In the
Panacea AES line of routers, these matrix sizes are available in both a coaxial
and a balanced interface.

Table 1-14. AES Audio Matrix Sizes


Matrix Size 1RU frame 2RU frame
8×8 Yes Yes
16×1 Yes Yes
*
16×2 Yes Yes
16×4 Yes Yes
16×8 Yes Yes
16×16 Yes Yes
32×1 No Yes
32×2* No Yes
32×4 No Yes
32×8 No Yes
32×16 No Yes
32×32 No Yes

* This routing matrix is set up via the 16×4 or 32×4 routing switcher,
with the quiet switch allowing you to set up a 16×2 or 32×2 with dual
outputs.

The basic routing matrices provide asynchronous AES switching. As an option,


a P-04Q submodule may be installed. This submodule provides synchronous or
Synchronous Quiet Switching (SQS)1 on the first four outputs. An extra input is
provided on each matrix as an AES reference input to be used by this optional
submodule. See page 43 for more information about the P-04Q submodule.
The Panacea AES audio routing switcher supports baseband AES signals as
well as compressed signals such as Dolby E and Diamond Audio.

Major Components
The Panacea AES matrix module consists of a single printed circuit board
(PCB) containing all the circuitry necessary for receiving, conditioning,
buffering, switching, and driving the routed signals as well as the circuitry
needed to communicate with the control module. In addition, this PCB includes

1 SQS
is a switching method involving a crossfade of the encoded data, eliminating switching
transients and achieving “pop”-free switching of AES audio signals. Since this method requires
processing of the data, it cannot be used on AES compatible compressed data streams such as
Dolby E or Diamond Audio.

46 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

the power connector, alarm connector, and communications connectors (one


BNC control input with loop-thru, one serial port, one Ethernet connector, and
one BNC reference input with loop-thru).
An optional SQS submodule, P-04Q, may be installed onto the matrix module.
This submodule may be configured to operate in two different modes:
synchronous or SQS.
• In Synchronous mode, the submodule provides synchronous switching of
AES or compressed AES compatible data streams on frame boundaries.
• In SQS mode, the submodule provides Synchronous Quiet Switching.
Core Routing Module
The Panacea AES audio core routing module board contains a 16×16 (or a
32×32) crosspoint matrix, input receivers, and output drivers. See page 6 for
more information about the core routing module.
Crosspoint PLD
The PLD performs all switching functions on the matrix module. Additionally,
the PLD contains the communications interface to the control module.
Input Receivers
The input signals are received by quad input receivers, which regenerate and
provide a DC offset to the input signals before being processed by the PLD.
Output Driver
The output circuitry buffers and conditions the switched signals to maintain
compliance with the required interface standard (balanced or coax).
Module Interconnect (MI)
The module interconnect provides communications, power conversion, and
reference conditioning for both the logic control module and the core router
module. It also provides control connectivity between the control module and
the core router module. This module monitors and controls the single relay
alarm for power loss or fan failure. The Alarm jumper, which sets the normally
open/normally closed operation of the alarm port, is located on the module
interconnect. See page 7 for more information about the module interconnect.
Back Panels
AES audio balanced back panel I/O modules use up to 8 D-Type 25-pin
connectors. Connectors are positioned as shown in Figure 1-25.

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 47
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Figure 1-25. AES Audio Balanced Rear Back Panel I/O Module Pin Connectors (P-32×32AEB shown)

AES audio coax back panel I/O modules use up to 32 BNC connectors for
inputs and up to 32 for outputs. BNCs are positioned as shown in Figure 1-26.

Figure 1-26. AES Audio Coax Rear Back Panel I/O Module Pin Connectors (P-32×32AEC shown)

Monitoring and Control


The Panacea AES audio routing switcher can be monitored and controlled
through any one of various means. It can be controlled locally via the front
panel control option or remotely via serial, X-Y, or Ethernet with a variety of
software packages, including RouterWorks®, Navigator™, and Pilot™. Various
monitoring and control options provide a means to manage the switching of
video and/or audio signals through this product as well as communicate the
status of the input and output signals. The monitoring/alarm capabilities of this
product enable you to act accordingly as the result of an alarm condition, should
one arise. See page 63 for alarm configuration details.

Power Conversion and Distribution


The external power supply converts 100VAC through 240VAC to +15VDC,
which is then supplied to the MI module. The +15V is applied to DC-DC
converters, which will produce the +5V and +3.3V rails required by the core
routing module.
A green LED on the front of the logic control module indicates that power is
present in the Panacea frame, but does not guarantee that all rails are present and
within required voltage limits.

48 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Control and Communications


The logic interface circuit allows the Panacea AES audio routing switcher
module to communicate with the Panacea system controller. In addition to
addressing the crosspoint matrix, the logic interface circuit also provides the
system controller with information about the system status. Matrix size, module
type, firmware revision level, input signal presence, and other information is
provided to the system controller through the logic interface. Information about
the core routing module can be viewed with a terminal or computer connected
to the Panacea system controller via the serial port.

Signal Flow
Figure 1-27 on page 49 is a signal flow diagram of the Panacea AES audio
routing switcher.

Quad input receivers 32 output drivers

To/from
4 control module 4

Control
4 interface 4

4 4

4 32×32 4
crosspoint

4 4

4 Optional 4
SQS
submodule
4 4

4 4

Looping reference buffer

Figure 1-27. Signal Flow Diagram of the AES Digital Audio Routing Switcher

Configuration Information
The AES audio module requires no additional procedures for configuring DIP
switches and the alarm port beyond those described for frame configuration.
Frame DIP switch and alarm port configuration is described on page 62 – 68.
The optional P-04Q submodule has configurable DIP switches (see Figure 3-16
on page 86).

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 49
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Installation Information
All internal modules are installed at the manufacturing facility.

Special Instructions for Dual Matrix, Same-Signal Format Panacea Routing Switchers
Matrix Partitioning
Panacea dual matrix routing switchers with the same format (for example, two
16×16 AES audio coax matrices in a single 2RU frame) will be partitioned from
larger Panacea back panel configurations prior to shipment. The two matrices
will be automatically assigned to levels 0 and 1. You can change the starting
level in Panacea routing switchers as follows:
• If your Panacea uses a standard resource card (P-RESL), the level setting
will always be consecutive for each matrix within the same frame. The
starting level setting can be changed via the SET FIRSTLEVEL terminal
command (see “SET FIRSTLEVEL” on page 158).
• If your Panacea uses an enhanced resource card (Ethernet-enabled
P-RESH), the levels can be “married” via the SET FIRSTLEVEL and SET
MPPARM terminal commands (see “SET FIRSTLEVEL” on page 178 and
“SET MPARM” on page 172).
Model Numbers and Descriptions
Table 1-15 provides the model numbers and descriptions for all AES audio
balanced dual matrix, same-signal format Panacea routing switchers. Table 1-16
provides the model numbers and descriptions for all AES audio coax dual
matrix, same-signal format Panacea routing switchers.

Table 1-15. AES Audio Balanced Signal Formats


Model Number Description
P16×16AEBAEBxx 16×16 dual AES audio balanced routing switcher
P8×8AEBAEBxx 8×8 dual AES audio balanced routing switcher
P16×1AEBAEBxx 16×1 dual AES audio balanced routing switcher
P16×4AEBAEBxx 16×4 dual AES audio balanced routing switcher
P16×8AEBAEBxx 16×8 dual AES audio balanced routing switcher

Table 1-16. AES Audio Coaxial Signal Formats


Model Number Description
P16×16AECAECxx 16×16 dual AES audio coaxial routing switcher
P8×8AECAECxx 8×8 dual AES audio coaxial routing switcher
P16×1AECAECxx 16×1 dual AES audio coaxial routing switcher
P16×4AECAECxx 16×4 dual AES audio coaxial routing switcher
P16×8AECAECxx 16×8 dual AES audio coaxial routing switcher

50 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2
Installation

Overview
Warning
Potentially lethal voltages are present within the frame
during normal operation. Disconnect all power cords from
the frame before you remove the front panel. Do not apply
power to the frame while the front panel is open unless the
unit is being serviced by properly trained personnel.

This chapter includes the following information necessary for installing a


Panacea frame:
• “Installing the Panacea Frame” on page 52
• “Installing Panacea Modules” on page 59
• “Field Upgrading the Panacea System” on page 59

Caution
We recommend that you test your system before its final
installation. Make sure you verify its configuration, cabling, and
proper system operation.

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 51
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Installation

Installing the Panacea Frame


Siting Requirements
Ensuring Adequate Rack Space
The Panacea frame is designed for mounting into a standard width 19-in.
(48.3-cm) rack. Frames are secured to the rack with standard front-mounting
ears built into the chassis. Make sure to provide adequate space behind the
mounting ears, and appropriate clearance for the connecting cables at the rear of
the frame.

Ensuring Proper Temperature and Ventilation


The Panacea frame is cooled by forced air that is drawn in from the left side of
the frame and expelled through the right side. You can stack any number of
frames in a rack as long as you maintain proper ventilation and remove all
obstructions to air flow.
An ambient temperature should be maintained between 32° F (0° C) and 122° F
(50° C) at a relative humidity of 10%-90% (non-condensing). No special
cooling arrangements are necessary, but make sure to prevent excessive ambient
heat rise in closed, unventilated equipment racks. To ensure proper ventilation,
keep the front panel of the frame closed during operation; otherwise, the frame
could overheat.

Meeting Electrical Requirements


Load Limitations
Both the 1RU and the 2RU mounting frame accept one desktop power supply
unit (PSU). Both frames are prewired to accept a second, optional power supply
for power backup. Their power consumption is nominally 65VA. A fully loaded
frame will operate with a single power supply; however, we recommend that
you include a second optional power supply for cooler operation and power
redundancy.
Maximum Power Dissipation
These ratings refer to the total module power consumption (excluding that of
the power supply) allowable within a Panacea frame. The limits are based on the
ability of the unit to dissipate heat over a temperature range of 32° F to 122° F
(0° C to 50° C).
Voltage Selection
The Panacea frame does not have a voltage selector switch. The desktop power
supply has a continuous input range of 100VAC to 240VAC.
Protective Ground
Since the desktop power supply does not present a shock hazard, the Panacea
frame does not have a protective safety earth ground.

52 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Installation

Mounting Requirements
A Panacea frame can be mounted in a standard width 19-in. (48.3 cm) rack
using four 10/32 Phillips-head mounting screws. The back of the frame does not
need to be supported. The frame can be mounted in either the front or the rear of
the rack, thereby providing more efficient use of your equipment housing space.
The rack ears can be attached to the frame in either direction, thereby allowing
you flexible mounting options.
The mounting requirements of the Panacea frame options are as follows:
• The 1RU mounting frame requires one unit of rack space, that is, 1.75 in.
(44 mm) of standard rack space. The depth from the mounting surface is
5.25 in. (13.3 cm).
• The 2RU mounting frame requires two units of rack space, that is, 3.5 in.
(88 mm) of standard rack space. The depth from the mounting surface is
5.25 in. (13.3 cm).

Mechanical Dimensions

Figure 2-1. Panacea Frame Physical Dimensions (1RU)

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 53
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Installation

Figure 2-2. Panacea Frame Physical Dimensions (2RU)

The desktop power supply is 6 in. (15.2 cm) wide by 1.1 in. (2.8 cm) high by
2.45 in. (6.2 cm) deep.

Figure 2-3. Desktop Power Supply Physical Dimensions

54 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Installation

Mounting a Panacea Frame in the Rack Front


Frames are secured to the rack with standard front-mounting ears built into the
chassis. The steps for mounting a Panacea frame in the front of the rack are
outlined in “Installation Procedures” on page 58.

Figure 2-4. Panacea Frame with Front-Mounting Ears

Mounting a Panacea Frame in the Rack Rear


Frames are secured to the rack with standard back-mounting ears attached to the
chassis. Make sure to provide adequate space behind the mounting ears, and
appropriate clearance for the connecting cables at the rear of the frame.

Figure 2-5. Panacea Frame with Back-Mounting Ears

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 55
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Installation

In-Frame Architecture
The Panacea is made of modular building blocks, which are as follows:
• Back panel I/O modules
• Resource module (standard or enhanced)
• Desktop power supply module
• Fan module (when requested)
• Extended processing module (e.g., clean switch, quiet switch, crosspoint,
etc.)
• Local control panel
All modules and power supplies ordered will be installed in the Panacea frame
before it is shipped.

Control Functionality
Program Mode
Program mode operation allows you to manipulate all system configuration and
routing parameters inherent in the router via any program operation (e.g.,
HyperTerminal1 commands, software applications, etc.). This mode ignores the
DIP switch settings for both destination and level offset, except during initial
startup when no valid database is detected. In this case, when the router first
boots up, it will initialize all registers with the DIP switch information until you
overwrite the information via program commands. To configure the Panacea for
Program mode operation, set the resource module’s DIP switches as shown in
Figure 3-4 on page 66.
The enhanced module uses two sub-modes under Program mode: simple
partitioning mode and advanced partitioning mode.
• Simple partitioning mode allows you to customize a router using terminal
commands. Once you have customized the router, you can then save these
settings by performing certain file operations. See Appendix D for a list of
these settings and operations.
• Advanced partitioning mode allows you to customize the router through
software such as RouterMapper. While in this mode you are not permitted
to set router parameters via terminal commands.
Simple partitioning mode and advanced partitioning mode are controlled via the
SET RMODE command. See page 176 for more information.

DIP Switch Mode


DIP switch mode operation allows you to operate your Panacea with minimal
(and often no) additional setup. This mode allows you to set parameters outside
of the ones supported by the DIP switches (e.g., destination offset and level
offset). All other parameters (e.g., source offset, data rate, matrix partitioning,
etc.) are settable while in DIP switch mode and will stay set through power-up

1 “HyperTerminal”
is a product of Hilgraeve, Inc., Monroe, Michigan.

56 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Installation

and power-down cycles. To configure the Panacea for DIP switch mode
operation, set the resource module’s DIP switches as shown in Figure 3-4 on
page 66.

Setting Up the Power Supply Module


One desktop power supply module is included as standard equipment in the
Panacea frame. Adding another power supply module provides redundancy. No
configuration settings are needed for the power supply module(s).
Push the power supply module plug into the PS1 connector (see Figure 2-6)
until the fastener clips. To make sure the power supply module is plugged in,
gently pull on the plug cable to make sure that the fastener is secure. It should
not pull out easily.

Caution
You may see an arc within the connector internally as the power
supply connection is made. This is normal.
If you are using a second power supply module, plug it into the PS2 connector
(see Figure 2-6). Follow the same procedure as for the first power supply.

Figure 2-6. PS1 and PS2 Power Supply Connector Locations

An optional power supply mounting tray allows you to mount up to seven 1RU
desktop power supplies, up to five 2RU desktop power supplies, or a
combination of 1RU and 2RU power supplies on the same tray. See Appendix H
for power supply mounting tray installation instructions.

Fan Module
The optional fan module is easily replaced in the field in the event of a fan
failure. There are no configuration settings needed for the fan module. See
Appendix I for fan replacement instructions.

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 57
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Installation

Installation Procedures

Note
Since the Panacea is specifically ordered in a particular
configuration, the Panacea frame will be custom configured to
those specifications.

The Panacea series can be installed anywhere within a routing system and can
be controlled in a variety of ways, including local control panels, PC-based
software control, or serial port control. Because the flexibility of the Panacea
series allows for many possible configurations, the installation procedures will
depend on the desired configuration and system design. General installation
procedures are outlined below.
1. Ensure that all packing foam, strapping, and tape is removed from the
frame.
2. Mount the frame in an rack that provides power and cooling facilities. The
frame is designed for mounting in a standard equipment rack.
3. Align the frame so that all 4 screw holes in the mounting ears match up with
those in the rack. (Adjustable ears on each side of the frame allow
adjustable depth placement of the frame within the rack.
4. Secure the frame to the rack with the rack screws and washers.
5. Connect all sources to the appropriate input connection on the back panel
I/O module(s).
6. Connect all destinations to the appropriate output connection on the back
panel I/O module(s).
7. Connect the control device(s) to the appropriate port (X-Y, SERIAL,
Ethernet, etc.) on the frame’s rear panel.
8. If the router is to be used in a multiple frame system, connect the additional
frames using port the appropriate scheme (X-Y, Ethernet, etc.).
9. If the router is at the end of the X-Y bus, terminate the other X-Y connector
with a coaxial 75Ω termination.
10. Connect the SYNC input connector to a valid reference signal if vertical
interval switching is desired.
11. Connect the 3-pin alarm port to the appropriate alarm device(s), as
necessary.
12. Connect the desktop power supply to the power source.
13. Connect the READY line as needed.

58 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Installation

Installing Panacea Modules


All internal modules are configured and installed at the manufacturing facility.
The only user-configurable settings that may need to be adjusted are the Alarm
jumper and the DIP switches. (The analog audio routing switcher allows an
additional jumper selectable married [stereo] or independent [dual channel]
matrix mode option).
• See page 63 for information about the Alarm jumper.
• See page 64 for information about the frame DIP switches; see page 86 for
information about the AES audio P-04Q submodule DIP switches.
• See page 73 for information about the analog audio married/independent
matrix mode options.

Field Upgrading the Panacea System


The Panacea product line is not designed for extensive field service; however,
some field service changes can be done on-site. See “Product Servicing” on
page xi for more information about field service.

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 59
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Installation

60 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3
Configuration

Overview
Warning
Potentially lethal voltages are present within the
frame during normal operation. Disconnect all power
cords from the frame before you remove the front
panel. Do not apply power to the frame while the
front panel is open unless the unit is being serviced
by properly trained personnel.

This chapter includes the following information necessary for configuring a


Panacea frame and modules:
• “DIP Switch Configuration: SW3” on page 68
• “Frame Configuration Details” on page 62
• “Module Configuration Details” on page 73
• “Analog Audio” on page 73
• “Analog Video” on page 75
• “Serial Digital Video (HS/S/R)” on page 75
• “Clean/Quiet Switch (P-SCQ, P-HSCQ)” on page 77
• “AES Audio” on page 86
• “Resource Module DIP Switch and Jumper Summary” on page 62

Caution
We recommend that you test your system before its final
installation. Make sure you verify its configuration, cabling, and
proper system operation.

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 61
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Configuration

Frame Configuration Details


Some Panacea front panel units do not have supporting hinges. Consequently, if
the front panel face plate is removed and not handled properly, it can fall with
sufficient force to dislocate and/or damage the ribbon cable attached to the
resource module connector. When removing the front panel, hold the face plate
firmly to ensure that it does not become damaged.

Note
Special module configuration details are explained in “Module
Configuration Details” on page 73.

Resource Module DIP Switch and Jumper Summary


Figure 3-1 and Figure 3-3 shows the location of the DIP switches on the
Panacea resource module. Figure 3-4 through Figure 3-6 provide a summary of
the functions of each DIP switch. Figure 3-2 shows the location of the alarm
port jumper on the Panacea MI board. (Specific information on the switches and
jumper appears throughout this chapter.)

Figure 3-1. Resource Module DIP Switch Location

Configuring the Panacea MI and Resource Module


There are two items that may need to be configured before operating the
resource module (if settings other than the defaults are desired):
• The Alarm jumper on the MI board
• Three DIP switches on the front of the resource module

62 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Configuration

Alarm Jumper on the MI Module


The Alarm jumper sets the normally open/normally closed operation of the
alarm port. For convenience, the alarm contact closures port provides both
normally open and normally closed contacts for each alarm condition.
• The normally open (NO) connection is open when the alarm condition does
not exist and is closed when the alarm condition exists. Unless otherwise
noted, the frame is shipped from the manufacturing facility with the alarm
port configured for normally open (NO) operation.
• The normally closed (NC) connection is closed when the alarm condition
does not exist and is open when the alarm condition exists.
To switch the alarm port from normally closed operation to normally open
operation, follow these steps:
1. Unplug the Panacea frame so that it does not receive electrical power.
2. Remove the screws on the front of the Panacea front panel. (The screws in
the front panel are captive. Do not separate them from the front panel.)
3. Gently pull the front panel away from the frame.
4. Tilt the front panel down to expose the MI module. The location of the
NO/NC jumper is shown in Figure 3-2.

Figure 3-2. Location of NO/NC Jumpers for the Alarm Port

5. Using a pair of tweezers or needle-nosed pliers, pull the jumper pack loose
from its location.
6. Push the jumper pack onto the pins of the desired location.

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 63
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Configuration

7. Tilt the front panel back up to cover the exposed front of the router.
8. Reattach the front panel to the Panacea router.

DIP Switches on the Resource Module


The resource module has three banks of 8-pole DIP switches that are accessible
from the front of the Panacea frame. These DIP switches can be set in two
different operating modes (DIP switch mode [page 66] and Program mode
[page 66]) for controlling the Panacea.

Default Settings
• For all modules except the P16SCQ and P16HSCQ, default settings are all
OFF: DIP switch mode on starting level 0 with the serial port set for Harris
(auto detect) protocol at 9600 baud rate.
• For the P16SCQ/P16HSCQ, SW1 pole 1 is ON; all other default settings
settings are OFF: Program mode on starting level 0 with the serial port set
for Harris (auto detect) protocol at 9600 baud rate.
To configure the Panacea DIP switches, follow these steps:
1. Remove the screws on the front of the Panacea front panel. (The screws in
the front panel are captive. Do not separate them from the front panel.)
2. Gently pull the front panel away from the frame.
3. Tilt the front panel down to expose the DIP switches.

Figure 3-3. DIP Switch Location and Identification

Panacea standard module configuration allows “marrying” both matrices of


a two-matrix configured frame. (Matrices can be “married” together and
appear to the control system as a single matrix, or they can be configured to
behave as two independent switchers.) If pole 4 on DIP switch SW3 is set to
Same Level (ON), both matrices are assigned levels beginning at the first

64 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Configuration

level assigned on poles 1-3 of DIP switch SW2. If the matrices are then
partitioned, the first partition of each matrix will begin at the same first
level. If pole 4 on DIP switch SW3 is set to Consecutive Levels (OFF),
contiguous levels are assigned, beginning at the first level assigned on poles
1-3 of DIP switch SW2.
4. Set the DIP switches as shown in Figure 3-4, Figure 3-5, and Figure 3-6.
SW1 (Figure 3-4 on page 66) provides DIP switches for these functions:
• Program/DIP switch mode
• Harris panel ID (DIP switch mode)
• Frame / panel ID (Program mode)
• IP Address
SW2 (Figure 3-5 on page 67) provides DIP switches for these functions:
• First Level
• Destination Offset
SW3 (Figure 3-6 on page 68) provides DIP switches for these functions:
• Serial port format
• RS-422 termination
• RS-422 multidrop mode
• (Standard modules) Multi-matrix addressing mode (see note) or
(enhanced modules) IP mode
• Serial port protocol
• Serial port baud rate
5. Tilt the front panel back up to cover the exposed front of the router.
6. Reattach the front panel to the Panacea router.

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 65
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Configuration

Figure 3-4. DIP Switch Configuration: SW1

66 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Configuration

Figure 3-5. DIP Switch Configuration: SW2

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 67
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Configuration

MSB SW3 LSB


O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
N

CTS 206-8 7030

Poles 7-8: Serial Port Baud Rate


7 8 7 8
9600 baud 38400 baud
7 8 7 8
19200 baud 115200 baud

Poles 5-6 (Standard Module): Serial Port Protocol


5 6 5 6
Leitch terminal GVG ASCII
5 6 5 6
Reserved GVG SMPTE

Pole 6 (Enhanced Module): Serial Port Configuration Mode


6 6
Use SW3 serial port Use configurations
configurations entered at terminal
Pole 5 (Enhanced Module): Reserved
5
Reserved

Pole 4 (Standard Module): Multi-Matrix Addressing Mode


4 4
Consecutive levels Same level

Pole 4 (Enhanced Module): IP Mode


4 4
Leitch X-Y protocol Reserved

Pole 3: Multidrop Mode (RS-422 Only)


3 3
Off On

Pole 2: Termination (RS-422 Only)


2 2
Off On

Pole 1: Serial Port Format


1 1
RS-232 RS-422

Figure 3-6. DIP Switch Configuration: SW3

68 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Configuration

Back Panel Connections


The control and power section of the rear panel includes these items:
• DC input power connector
• (Optional) AC or DC power module
• One 3-pin alarm/comm port (“Ready Line”)
• One 9-pin serial port
• One pair of BNC X-Y ports (single looping X-Y)
• One pair of BNC sync ports (single looping reference input)
• One RJ-45 Ethernet connection (enhanced resource module only)

Figure 3-7. Power and Control Section

Alarm/Comm Port
The 3-pin alarm/comm port reports alarms as they occur in the frame, and
provides a synchronization pin for multiple frame routing systems.
• Pin 1 (labeled “+”) – Normally open/normally closed (jumper selectable)
• “Normally closed” is shorted with the common (closed) when an alarm
condition does not exist and the frame is powered.
• “Normally open” is shorted with the common (closed) when an alarm
condition exists. The default operation of the alarm relay is “normally
open.”
• Pin 2 (GND) – Relay common
• Pin 3 (labeled “–”) – READY line (synchronizes Panacea frames in a
multiple frame routing system); a wire connected from this pin to the
READY line pin on all other frames in the system will ensure that switches
occur simultaneously between router frames

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 69
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Configuration

The alarm port provides indication of these alarm conditions:

Table 3-1. Alarm Conditions


Alarm Condition Description
PS fail Alarm asserted in the event of a power supply failure (in
systems with multiple power supplies, the alarm will be
asserted if any power supply fails)
Fan (module) fail Alarm asserted in the event of a failure of the frame
cooling fans
Specific alarms Generated by core routing module

The alarm relay circuitry has been designed so the relays are energized when the
alarm condition does not exist. If a relay fails or if the circuit controlling a relay
fails, the relay will de-energize causing the corresponding alarm to be asserted.
If the frame loses power, the alarm relay will become de-energized, and the
alarm condition will be asserted. The relay is energized when power is applied
to detect when power is lost and to allow the alarm to be asserted.

Figure 3-8. Typical Alarm Operation

Serial Port

Note
You will find detailed information about serial control configuration
and operation in Chapter 5.

One of the many powerful features of a Harris router control system is its ability
to use a serial port to access the entire system. The serial port, in effect, can be
the control gateway to the entire routing system.The serial port allows external
control of the Panacea by a computer, user, or automation system via a serial
connection using RS-232 or RS-422.
• Pin assignments for RS-232 signal format are provided in Table 5-1 on
page 94.

70 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Configuration

• Pin assignments for RS-422 signal format are provided in Table 5-2 on
page 94.
The port is configured for RS-232 or RS-422 using DIP switches on the
resource module (see Figure 3-6 on page 68)
The serial control port supports two-level control via commands in the Harris
protocol, the Grass Valley Group SMPTE (binary) and ASCII serial port
command protocols. Changes made to the crosspoint status using the serial port
are reflected on any control panel connected to the routing switcher.
All Harris protocols currently use 8 data bits, no parity, and 1 stop bit.

X-Y Port
The X-Y control bus is a high speed serial interface by which Harris routers and
control panels are interconnected. The X-Y control bus links multiple routers
and control panels in a bus topology.
The X-Y coaxial control port allows control panels and router frames to be
interconnected using standard 75Ω video coax cable. The ends of the X-Y bus
must be terminated using standard 75Ω video terminators.
The Panacea features one looped-through port (two BNC connectors). If either
of the BNCs is used, the other associated X-Y port connection must be
terminated with a 75Ω BNC terminator or connected to another device’s
X-Y port. For example, it is not necessary to terminate either of the BNCs if
neither is used.

Sync Port (Reference Signal Input)


The sync port is the input connection for a synchronization signal. A sync signal
is typically an external NTSC or PAL composite video reference signal or a 4
Vp-p composite sync signal. Locking the routing switcher to a valid sync signal
is necessary if vertical interval switching is required. Panacea supports tri-level
sync in addition to standard, NTSC, and PAL reference types.
Panacea uses these timing mode options: Auto, Standard, and Advanced.
• In Auto mode:
• The switch point is determined by the detected sync type only based on
SMPTE RP-168 specifications. If you want to change from these
defaults, the operation described in the sections titled “Standard Mode”
or “Advanced Mode” will be required. The router will reconfigure
when a new sync is detected. The switch timing assumes that the sync
signal and the I/O signals are the same.
• If no reference is detected, the router will default to a set time delay
before switching.
• In Standard mode:
• The switch point is determined by your choice of signal type. The
switch point is then determined by a look-up of SMPTE RP-168
specifications. If the you want to change from this default, the operation

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 71
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Configuration

described in “Advanced Mode” will be required. Based upon the signal


type you choose, the switch point will be determined by a cross-lookup
of the correct timing for that type of signal and the detected sync type.
• If no sync is detected, the router will default to a set time delay before
switching.
• In Advanced mode:
• Enter a delay (in microseconds) for switching with reference to the sync
pulse of the sync signal.
• This allows full flexibility for custom requirements.
For information on how to set the timing mode for a standard resource module,
see “SET TIMING” on page 159. For information on how to set the timing
mode for an enhanced resource module, see “SET TIMING” on page 171.

Ethernet Connection
(Available only on enhanced resource module) The Ethernet connection
provides high-speed links for configuration, control, and monitoring of the
complete routing system. The Ethernet connection uses 10/100Base-T wiring.
The pin assignments for the Ethernet connection are listed in Table 3-2.

Table 3-2. Pin Assignments to Ethernet Connections


Pin Function Pin Function
1 Transmit Data + 5 Not used
2 Transmit Data - 6 Receive Data -
3 Receive Data + 7 Not used
4 Not used 8 Not used

Back Panel I/O Modules


Analog Audio Back Panel I/O Modules Connectors
The analog audio back panel I/O modules use up to 16 D-Type 25-pin
connectors. These connectors are positioned as shown in Figure 1-16 on
page 17.
Analog Video Back Panel I/O Modules Connectors
The analog video back panel I/O modules use up to 32 BNC connectors for
inputs and up to 32 for outputs. These BNCs are positioned as shown in
Figure 1-18 on page 22.
Serial Digital Video Rear Back Panel I/O Module Connectors
The serial digital video back panel I/O modules use up to 32 BNC connectors
for inputs and up to 32 for outputs. These BNCs are positioned as shown in
Figure 1-20 on page 32.

72 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Configuration

AES Audio Balanced Rear Back Panel I/O Module Connectors


The AES audio balanced back panel I/O modules use up to 8 D-Type 25-pin
connectors. These connectors are positioned as shown in Figure 1-25 on
page 48.
AES Audio Coax Rear Back Panel I/O Module Connectors
The AES audio coax back panel I/O modules use up to 32 BNC connectors for
inputs and up to 32 for outputs. These BNCs are positioned as shown in
Figure 1-26 on page 48.

Module Configuration Details


Configuration details specific to a particular module are described below. If the
module requires no specialized procedures, only frame configuration is
necessary. See “Frame Configuration Details” on page 62 for more information
about frame configuration.

Analog Audio
Configuring DIP Switches and the Alarm Port
This module requires no specialized procedures for configuring DIP switches
and the alarm port.

Configuring the Stereo (“Married) / Dual Mono (“Independent”) Matrix Mode Jumper
When shipped, the J7 jumper is set to “married” as the default setting.
The analog audio module can be configured for operation as a “married”
(stereo) or “independent” (dual mono) matrix. A jumper pack on the P-A2-SB
module, as shown in Figure 3-9 on page 74, controls the matrix mode. See
Table 1-2 on page 17 for a list of the matrices that support this mode.
To select independent (dual channel) operation or married (stereo) matrix mode,
follow these steps:
1. Unplug the Panacea frame so that it does not receive electrical power.
2. Remove the screws on the front of the Panacea front panel. (The screws in
the front panel are captive. Do not separate them from the front panel.)
3. Gently pull the front panel away from the frame.
4. Tilt the front panel down to expose the analog audio submodule. The
location of the “married/independent” matrix mode jumper is shown in
Figure 3-9 on page 74.
5. Using a pair of tweezers or needle-nosed pliers, pull the jumper pack loose
from its location on J7.
6. Choose one of the following:
• Push the jumper pack across pins 1 and 2 of J7 for “independent” (dual
mono).
• Leave the jumper pack off for “married” (stereo).

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 73
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Configuration

7. Tilt the front panel back up to cover the exposed front of the router.
8. Reattach the front panel to the Panacea router.
9. Reapply power to the frame, and verify proper functionality in the new
matrix mode.

Figure 3-9. “Married/Independent” Matrix Mode Jumper

Connector Pin Assignments


Table 3-3. Analog Audio Connector Pin Assignments
.

Pin Output 1-8 or Output 9-16 or Output 17-24 or Output 25-32 or


Input 1-8 Input 9-16 Input 17-24 Input 25-32
1 Unused Unused Unused Unused
2 8 GND 16 GND 24 GND 32 GND
3 7- 15- 23- 31-
4 7+ 15+ 23+ 31+
5 6 GND 14 GND 22 GND 30 GND
6 5- 13- 21- 29-
7 5+ 13+ 21+ 29+
8 4 GND 12 GND 20 GND 28 GND
9 3- 11- 19- 27-
10 3+ 11+ 19+ 27+
11 2 GND 10GND 18 GND 26 GND
12 1- 9- 17- 25-
13 1+ 9+ 17+ 25+
14 8- 16- 24- 32-
15 8+ 16+ 24+ 32+

74 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Configuration

Table 3-3. Analog Audio Connector Pin Assignments (Continued)


Pin Output 1-8 or Output 9-16 or Output 17-24 or Output 25-32 or
Input 1-8 Input 9-16 Input 17-24 Input 25-32
16 7 GND 15 GND 23 GND 31 GND
17 6- 14- 22- 30-
18 6+ 14+ 22+ 30+
19 5 GND 13 GND 21 GND 29 GND
20 4- 12- 20- 28-
21 4+ 12+ 20+ 28+
22 3 GND 11 GND 19 GND 27 GND
23 2- 10- 18- 26-
24 2+ 10+ 18+ 26+
25 1 GND 9 GND 17 GND 25 GND

Analog Video
This module requires no specialized configuration procedures.

Serial Digital Video (HS/S/R)


Configuring DIP Switches and the Alarm Port
This module requires no specialized procedures for configuring DIP switches
and the alarm port.

Output Format Selection

The output format is controlled by the Reclockmode setting. Reclockmode


settings are used by autotiming to set the output standard. They only take effect
when autotiming is performed. (Reclockmode setup may be initiated either
through a Hyperterminal session or through the Panacea control application.) In
Table 3-4, the number in parentheses (#) equates to the reclock mode as it
appears in the terminal interface.

Table 3-4. Output Format Selections


Output Format Description
Auto-Mode (0) When an output is set to auto mode (factory default), autotiming will select the most
prevalent input standard that is valid with the given reference. If the same number of S and
HS inputs are found, it will default to HS. If the same number of 1080i and 720p are fond,
it will default to 1080i. Both outputs will be the selected standard.
270Mb/s (4) When this mode is selected, the output will be formatted as Standard Definition 525 lines in
a 270 Mb/s stream. This mode requires an NTSC reference.
270 Mb/s-50 (9) When this mode is selected, the output will be formatted as Standard Definition 625 lines in
a 270 Mb/s stream. This mode requires a PAL reference.

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 75
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Configuration

Table 3-4. Output Format Selections (Continued)


Output Format Description
1.485 Gb/s-1080i/29.9 (7) When this mode is selected, the output will be formatted as High Definition 1080i /29.97 in
a 1.485 Gb/s stream. This mode requires either an NTSC reference or a 1080i/ 29.97
tri-level reference.
1.485 Gb/s-1080i/25 (10) When this mode is selected, the output will be formatted as High Definition 1080i /25 in a
1.485 Gb/s stream. This mode requires either an PAL reference or a 1080i/25 tri-level
reference.
1.485 Gb/s-1080i/30 (11) When this mode is selected, the output will be formatted s High Definition 1080i /30 in a
1.485 Gb/s stream. This mode requires a 1080i/30 tri-level reference.
1.485 Gb/s-720p/59.9 (13) When this mode is selected, the output will be formatted as High Definition 1080i/59.94 in
a 1.485 Gb/s stream. This mode requires either an NTSC reference or a 1080i/59.94
tri-level reference.
1.485 Gb/s-720pi/60 (15) When this mode is selected, the output will be formatted as High Definition 1080i/60 in a
1.485 Gb/s stream. This mode requires a 720p/60 tri-level reference.

See Appendix C for information about standard module Reclock and


Autotiming modes:
• AUTOTIME (page 155)
• SET RECLOCKMODE (page 158)
• SHOW RECLOCKMODES (page 160)
• SHOW RECLOCKSETTINGS (page 160)
See Appendix D for information about enhanced module Reclock and
Autotiming modes:
• GET RECLOCKMODE (page 169)
• SET AUTOTIME (page 169)
• SET RECLOCKMODE (page 169)
• SHOW RECLOCKMODES (page 169)
• SHOW RECLOCKSTATUS (page 169)

76 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Configuration

Clean/Quiet Switch (P-SCQ, P-HSCQ)


Configuring DIP Switches and the Alarm Port
This module requires no specialized procedures for configuring DIP switches
and the alarm port.

Setting Up the Clean Switch via RouterMapper

Note
If you want to set up the clean switch via terminal operation
commands, see page 83.

Panacea clean/quiet switch routers provide error-free switching of digital video


by delaying each signal according to its timing so that all output signals are sent
in a continuous stream with the same alignment to a required reference signal.
This is done by incorporating a buffer capable of storing a line of video. The
buffer is emptied at the same alignment to the reference for all inputs which,
when combined with switching per SMPTE RP-168, provides an error-free
switch. A continuous output stream is provided in which the video data content
changes while the underlying transport stream is maintained in a continuous
manner. The clean switch also maintains an output signal when a switch is made
to an input with no signal. It supplies an internally generated black signal to
maintain lock of downstream equipment.

Setting Up Clean Switch Reclock Mode (P-SCQ and P-HSCQ Modules)

Note
This section presupposes that you have a working knowledge of
RouterMapper and have used its other capabilities. If not, please
refer to the RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide
and familiarize yourself with its functions before you continue.

1. At the RouterMapper main window, highlight the name of the P-SCQ or


P-HSCQ router that you want to modify.
2. Click the right mouse button to display a drop-down menu.
3. Scroll down to the Parametric Settings... option; then, click <Enter>.
4. The Parametric Settings window will appear.
5. Select the Transition tab (see Figure 3-10 on page 78), and then click
Refresh. The factory default Reclocker setting (Auto) will appear for
Program Output 1 (PGM 1).

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 77
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Configuration

Figure 3-10. Transition Tab

6. Select the output to change by choosing PGM 1 or PGM 2 in the Output


pull-down list.
7. Open the Reclocker pull-down list and choose the reclocker format desired.
Only the reclocker choices valid for the sync type applied to the frame will
appear. Table 3-5 provides a list of input standards supported for each of the
supported reference signal types.
The Auto settings are used for all typical applications.

Table 3-5. Supported Input Standards for Supported Reference


Signal Types
Clean Switch Reference Supported Signal Types
NTSC 270-525, 1.485-1080i/299 or 720p/299
PAL 270-625, 1.485-1080i/25 or 720p/50
1080i/299 1.485-1080i/299
720p/599 1.485-720p/599
1080i/25 1.485-1080i/25
1080i/30 1.485-1080i/30
720p/60 1.485-720p/60

8. After making the reclocker choices, press Set.


9. RouterMapper will ask to Autotime the unit after making these changes.
Click Yes to proceed. (See page 79.)

78 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Configuration

Setting Up the Clean Switch Autotiming


1. If necessary, select the Clean Switch tab.
2. Verify that the sources to be timed appear as ENABLE in the Availability
column. (The autotiming status of each source is shown in the Availability
column.)

Note
To enable or disable inputs that do not have source connections:
Select the source line.
Click Enable to include the source in the Autotime sequence.
OR
Click Disable to remove the source from the Autotime sequence.

3. Click Auto Timing. After the Autotime is complete, click Refresh1.

Figure 3-11. Clean Switch Tab

The In Time column will show you if sources are within the required
timing window. The Vertical Time and Horizontal Time columns will
indicate the actual timing.
• If a “No” appears in the In Time column or the Vertical Time and
Horizontal Time columns contain dashes (–), autotiming can take
place:
• Click Auto Timing.

1 “Refresh”
is required for any updated information to be displayed accurately. Timing
information is only updated during the Autotime sequence.

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 79
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Configuration

• Wait for the autotime to take place (approximately 30 seconds).


Sources out of time will blink on the front panel.
• Click Refresh.
• If the In Time column still displays a “No” or if dashes still appear
in the Vertical Time and Horizontal Time columns, check sources
and source timing.
4. Select the Transition tab, and then click Refresh. The factory default
transition setting (“cut”) will appear.

Figure 3-12. Factory Default Transition Settings

80 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Configuration

a. If you want a different transition type, click on the Transition Type


drop-down list box, and then make your selection.
b. If you want to set a different transition duration, click on the Transition
Duration bar and slide it to the desired rate (both seconds and frames
are indicated). The transition duration change will apply to all
transitions except Cut, which does not have a duration.

Figure 3-13. Transition Duration Bar

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 81
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Configuration

By default, audio effects is set to Pass-Through so it will always cut,


regardless of the video transition. To allow other transitions:
a. Click Advanced. The Audio Processing Settings tab will appear.
b. If necessary, click the Effects tab.

Figure 3-14. Effects Tab

c. Click Refresh to reset the tab entries to their defaults.


d. In the Output drop-down list box, select PGM 1.
e. Select the radio button next to a group associated with PGM 1. (Each
group contains four audio channels.)
f. Select the Audio Group Present in Output check box for each group.
g. From the Channel 1 & 2 and the Channel 3 & 4 drop-down list boxes,
verify “None,” or select the desired effect.
h. Repeat steps e, f, and g for each group associated with PGM 1.
i. Click Set to accept changes.

Note
If you are not using PGM 2, skip to step 6.

j. If necessary, in the Output drop-down list box, select PGM 2.


k. Select the radio button next to a group associated with PGM 2.
l. Select the Audio Group Present in Output check box for each group.
m. From the Channel 1 & 2 and the Channel 3 & 4 drop-down list boxes,
verify “None,” or select the desired effect.

82 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Configuration

n. Repeat steps k, l, and m for each group associated with PGM 2.


5. Click Set to accept changes.
6. Click OK until you return to the RouterMapper main menu window.
If you made changes to the transition duration, a message (“Needs
Download”) will appear next to the router or panel name listed on the
RouterMapper main menu window. Highlight the appropriate devices and
click Download to download the revised settings.

Clean Switch Setup/Output Format Selection via Terminal Operation Commands

Note
If you want to set up the clean switch via RouterMapper, see
page 77.

The BNC connector labels on a a P16SCQ will display the same label markings
as a P16HSCQ. See Figure 3-15 for an illustration.

Figure 3-15. BNC Connector Label Markings for P16SCQ / P16HSCQ

Setup

Note
For information about setting autotiming for standard modules, see
“AUTOTIME” on page 155. For information about setting
autotiming for enhanced modules, see “SET AUTOTIME” on page
169.

The clean switch operates off a line buffer. Input signals must be synchronized
and timed within one line of each other for clean switching to occur. The clean
switch module for the S version supports standard definition and a standard
definition reference is used.
The Panacea unit automatically picks a buffer suitable to most inputs available.
Autotiming setup may be initiated either through a Hyperterminal session or
through the Panacea control application. The unit also will run the autotiming
setup at power-on when the router is first received from the factory. This will
occur at each power-on until a valid reference and at least on valid input signal
are detected. From this point on, the unit will use stored information until
autotiming is manually initiated.

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 83
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Configuration

Table 3-6 provides a list of input standards supported for each of the supported
reference signal types.

Table 3-6. Supported Input Standards for Reference Signal Types


Clean Switch Reference Supported Signal Types
NTSC 270-525, 1.485-1080i/59.9 or 720p/50.0
PAL 270-625, 1.485-1080i/50.0
1080i/299 1.485-1080i/59.9
720p/599 1.485-720p/59.9
1080i/25 1.485-1080i/50.0
1080i/30 1.485-720p/60.0
720p/60 1.485-720p/60.0

Output Format Selection


The output format is controlled by the Reclockmode setting. Reclockmode
settings on the clean switch are used by autotiming to set the output standard.
They only take effect when autotiming is performed. (Reclockmode setup may
be initiated either through a Hyperterminal session or through the Panacea
control application.) In Table 3-7, the number in parentheses (#) equates to the
reclock mode as it appears in the terminal interface.

Table 3-7. Output Format Selections


Output Format Description
Auto-Mode (0) When an output is set to auto mode (factory default), autotiming will select the most
prevalent input standard that is valid with the given reference. If the same number of S and
HS inputs are found, it will default to HS. If the same number of 1080i and 720p are fond,
it will default to 1080i. Both outputs will be the selected standard.
270Mb/s (4) When this mode is selected, the output will be formatted as Standard Definition 525 lines
in a 270 Mb/s stream. This mode requires an NTSC reference.
270 Mb/s-50 (9) When this mode is selected, the output will be formatted as Standard Definition 625 lines
in a 270 Mb/s stream. This mode requires a PAL reference.
1.485Gb/s-1080i/59.9 (7) When this mode is selected, the output will be formatted as High Definition 1080i /29.97
in a 1.485 Gb/s stream. This mode requires either an NTSC reference or a 1080i/ 29.97
tri-level reference.
1.485 Gb/s-1080i/50.0 (10) When this mode is selected, the output will be formatted as High Definition 1080i /25 in a
1.485 Gb/s stream. This mode requires either an PAL reference or a 1080i/25 tri-level
reference.
1.485 Gb/s-1080i/60.0 (11) When this mode is selected, the output will be formatted s High Definition 1080i /30 in a
1.485 Gb/s stream. This mode requires a 1080i/30 tri-level reference.
1.485 Gb/s-720p/59.9 (13) When this mode is selected, the output will be formatted as High Definition 1080i/59.94 in
a 1.485 Gb/s stream. This mode requires either an NTSC reference or a 1080i/59.94
tri-level reference.
1.485 Gb/s-720pi/60 (15) When this mode is selected, the output will be formatted as High Definition 1080i/60 in a
1.485 Gb/s stream. This mode requires a 720p/60 tri-level reference.

84 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Configuration

See Appendix C for information about standard module Reclock and


Autotiming modes:
• AUTOTIME (page 155)
• SET RECLOCKMODE (page 158)
• SHOW RECLOCKMODES (page 160)
• SHOW RECLOCKSETTINGS (page 160)
See Appendix D for information about enhanced module Reclock and
Autotiming modes:
• GET RECLOCKMODE (page 169)
• SET AUTOTIME (page 169)
• SET RECLOCKMODE (page 169)
• SHOW RECLOCKMODES (page 169)
• SHOW RECLOCKSTATUS (page 169)

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 85
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Configuration

AES Audio
Configuring DIP Switches and the Alarm Port
The AES audio module requires no specialized procedures for configuring DIP
switches and the alarm port; however, the P-04Q submodule has configurable
DIP switches (see Figure 3-16).

P-04Q Submodule DIP Switches


Figure 3-16 shows configurable DIP switch settings for the P-04Q submodule.

Figure 3-16. P-04Q DIP Switch Settings

In 32×4 and 16×4 matrices, the router can be configured for 4 destinations or 2
destinations with dual outputs. When configured for two destinations, two
identical output signals are provided for each destination. Destination 1 appears
on outputs 1 and 2. Destination 2 appears on outputs 3 and 4.

86 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Configuration

In other matrix sizes, the router can be configured to provide the SQS outputs
on the first four destinations; or, in dual partitioned matrices, on the first two
destinations of each partition. For example, if a 16×16 matrix is partitioned into
dual 8×8 matrices, the first two destinations of each 8×8 partition will be the
SQS outputs.

Connector Pin Assignments


Table 3-8. AES Audio (Balanced I/O) Connector Pin Assignments
.

Pin Output 1-8 or Output 9-16 or Output 17-24 or Output 25-32 or


Input 1-8 Input 9-16 Input 17-24 Input 25-32
1 Unused Unused Unused Unused
2 8 GND 16 GND 24 GND 32 GND
3 7- 15- 23- 31-
4 7+ 15+ 23+ 31+
5 6 GND 14 GND 22 GND 30 GND
6 5- 13- 21- 29-
7 5+ 13+ 21+ 29+
8 4 GND 12 GND 20 GND 28 GND
9 3- 11- 19- 27-
10 3+ 11+ 19+ 27+
11 2 GND 10GND 18 GND 26 GND
12 1- 9- 17- 25-
13 1+ 9+ 17+ 25+
14 8- 16- 24- 32-
15 8+ 16+ 24+ 32+
16 7 GND 15 GND 23 GND 31 GND
17 6- 14- 22- 30-
18 6+ 14+ 22+ 30+
19 5 GND 13 GND 21 GND 29 GND
20 4- 12- 20- 28-
21 4+ 12+ 20+ 28+
22 3 GND 11 GND 19 GND 27 GND
23 2- 10- 18- 26-
24 2+ 10+ 18+ 26+
25 1 GND 9 GND 17 GND 25 GND

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 87
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Configuration

88 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4
Operation

Overview
This chapter includes the following information:
• “Control Features” on page 90
• “Control Functionality” on page 92
• “DIP Switch Mode” on page 92
• “Firmware-Based Control System” on page 91
• “Front Panel Options” on page 90
• “Program Mode” on page 92
• “Software-Based Control Systems” on page 91

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 89
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Operation

Control Features
The Panacea modular routing switchers are compatible with all existing Harris
routers and control panels. Panacea frames include the following control
options:
• A standard serial port for remote control from computers, users, and
automation systems (configurable for RS-232 or RS-422) (see page 70 for
configuration information)
• A single looping X-Y port for connecting to remote control panels and other
routers (see page 71 for configuration information)
• A single looping sync port for the connection for a synchronization signal
(see page 71 for configuration information)
• An alarm port
• An Ethernet port1 (see page 72 for configuration information)
• A local control panel option
• A software-based control system

Front Panel Options


You can configure your Panacea frame with one of two front panel styles:
• A blank front
Using an RS-232 serial cable, connect the Panacea frame to a local PC or
laptop. Follow the steps outlined in Appendix B: “Terminal Operation” for
setting up a Hyperterminal2 session to perform serial port operation
commands.
• An optional local control panel (use any Harris control panels except the
ABAp panel series, 12×2HADESC2, and 32×8p)
We offer a wide variety of programmable control panels that can be used to
control your Panacea. The programmable panel series uses RouterMapper
configuration utility software to program the panel for customization.
For more information about operating your local control panel, refer to the
RCP-P Programmable Control Panel Series Configuration and Operation
Manual.
For more information about RouterMapper, see the RouterMapper
Configuration Utility Reference Guide.

Note
You can download PDF versions of the control panel and Router-
Mapper manuals from our website.

1 Ethernet connection capability is available only with the enhanced resource module.
2 HyperTerminal,
a product of Hilgraeve Inc., is a communications applet that ships with
Windows 95/98 and Windows NT 4.0.

90 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Operation

Firmware-Based Control System


The Panacea can operate in two modes:
• DIP switch mode (page 92), which is used for basic matrix switching on the
X-Y bus with Harris protocol
• Program mode (page 92), which is used when you want to use other
protocols, software matrix partitioning, non-typical offsetting, or a variety
of starting levels
These two modes allow the Panacea to be a part of virtually any signal routing
system.

Software-Based Control Systems


Your Panacea modular routing switcher system makes use of the most
innovative control systems available on the market today. The operating system
used for the Panacea is a real-time embedded operating system that uses an
interrupt-driven and priority-based task scheduling algorithm to control the
operations of the router. This means that switches will occur in a timely manner,
which allows the Panacea to be used in broadcast facilities where timing is
crucial to the success of the facility.
The configuration utility for programming your Panacea for operation is called
RouterMapper, an easy-to-use Windows®-based application for programming
RouterWorks, router frames, control panels, and the Opus master controller.
Using RouterMapper, you may create a database that describes a routing system
(i.e., available levels, sources, and destinations). That database may be
downloaded to a control panel and/or router frame, and may be used in
conjunction with RouterWorks software applications. See your RouterMapper
manual for instructions on how to set up your Panacea for operation.
There are several options available to control your Panacea:
• Navigator™, an application that allows you to easily create custom browser
pages that represent your network and its various environments around the
world. You can associate objects on these pages with network events,
user-defined actions, and other browser pages. This allows you to
consolidate, simplify, and centralize the status monitoring of the network's
many devices and environments on a few easy-to-use and -understand
browser pages. This can lead to more efficient and economical operation of
your network.
• RouterWorks®, a Windows®-based 32 bit control system. RouterWorks
uses a graphic user interface to improve the manageability and ease of use
of the control system.

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 91
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Operation

Control Functionality
Program Mode
Program mode operation allows you to manipulate all system configuration and
routing parameters inherent in the router via any program operation (e.g.,
HyperTerminal commands, software applications, etc.). This mode ignores the
DIP switch settings for both destination and level offset in most cases, except
during initial startup when no valid database is detected. In this case, when the
router first boots up, it will initialize all registers with the DIP switch
information until you overwrite the information via program commands.
Program mode requires router configuration to be done via a computer.
RouterMapper, the Windows-based router configuration utility software
program, will configure the Panacea in Program mode. (Refer to the
RouterMapper manual for information on configuring the Panacea.)
Alternatively, you can conduct a Hyperterminal session to configure the
Panacea in Program mode. (Refer to Appendix B for information on setting up a
Hyperterminal session.)
To configure the Panacea for Program mode operation, set the resource
module’s DIP switches as shown in Figure 3-4 on page 66.
For more information about operating procedure in Program mode, refer to the
Serial Protocol Reference for Harris Routing Switchers Operation and
Reference Manual.

DIP Switch Mode


DIP switch mode operation allows you to operate your Panacea with minimal
(and often no) additional setup. This mode allows you to set parameters outside
of the ones supported by the DIP switches (e.g., destination offset and level
offset). All other parameters (e.g. source offset, data rate, matrix partitioning,
etc.) are settable while in DIP switch mode and will remain set in non-volatile
memory through power-up and power-down cycles.
To configure the Panacea for DIP switch mode operation, set the resource
module’s DIP switches as shown in Figure 3-4 on page 66.

92 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 5
Serial Control Configuration and Operation

Overview

Note
This information applies to standard mode only. If you upgrade
your Panacea frame to enhanced mode, GVG TEN-XL operations
will no longer be available.

This chapter contains information on:


• “Serial Control Configuration” on page 94
• “Operation Using Harris Terminal Protocol” on page 95
• “Operation Using GVG TEN-XL ASCII Protocol” on page 98
• “Operation Using GVG TEN-XL SMPTE (Binary) Protocol” on page 103

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 93
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 5: Serial Control Configuration and Operation

Serial Control Configuration


One of the many powerful features of the Harris router control system is its
ability to use a serial port to access the entire system. The serial port, in effect, is
the control gateway to the entire routing system.The serial port allows external
control of the Panacea by a computer, user, or automation system via a serial
connection using RS-232 or RS-422.

Serial Port Pin Assignments


• RS-232 signal format pin assignments are shown in Table 5-1.
• RS-422 signal format pin assignments are shown in Table 5-2.

Table 5-1. RS-232 Signal Format Pin Assignments


Pin Function
1 Frame Ground
2 RxD (Data received by router)
3 TxD (Data sent by router)
4 Data Terminal Ready*
5 Ground
6 Data Set Ready (DSR)*
7 Request to Send (RTS)**
8 Clear to Send (RTS)**
9 Frame Ground
* Pins 4 and 6 connected internally.
** Pins 7 and 8 connected internally

Table 5-2. RS-422 Signal Format Pin Assignments


Connection to Remote
Pin Signal (Tributary) Description
Computer (Controller)
1 FG Frame Ground Frame Ground
2 Ta (Tx-) Transmitted Data Ra (Rx-)
(Twisted Pair)
7 Tb (Tx+) Rb (Rx+)
6 Tc Received Data Shield Received Data Shield
8 Ra (Rx-) Received Data Ta (Tx-)
(Twisted Pair)
3 Rb (Rx+) Tb (Tx+)
4 Rc Transmitted Data Shield Transmitted Data Shield
9 FG Frame Ground Frame Ground
5 SP (Not Connected) (Not Connected)

94 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 5: Serial Control Configuration and Operation

Serial Port RS-232/RS-422 Configuration


The port is configured for RS-232 or RS-422 using DIP switches on the
resource module (see Figure 3-6 on page 68).

Operation Using Harris Terminal Protocol


Harris terminal protocol is the specific protocol used by Harris routers. The
Panacea has two types of protocol: single-bus and multi-bus. Single-bus is used
when the two destinations are the same destination located on two different
levels. Multi-bus is used when the two destinations are on the same level.

DIP Switch Settings


Harris terminal protocol is enabled using the DIP switch setting, as shown in
Figure 3-6 on page 68.

Data Format
In Harris terminal protocol, all words are sent and received using the following
format:

Table 5-3. Harris Protocol Data Format


Data Format Description
Data rate DIP switch selectable
Default data rate 9600 baud rate
Data encoding 8 data bits (ASCII data, most significant
bit always 0)
No parity
1 stop bit
Communications standard RS-232 or RS-422; jumper pack
selectable
Default communications standard RS-232

Communications Interlocking
The serial control port does not use hardware handshaking to coordinate data
flow between the control port and the user. Data transmission to the serial
control port is controlled by means of a prompt character and requires no
additional handshaking (the serial control port incorporates a 250 Byte
type-ahead buffer to ease input timing). However, data transmission from the
serial control port can be controlled by employing the XON/XOFF software
flow control. Output from the serial control port can be paused by sending an
XOFF (hexadecimal 13 or, on a terminal, by holding down the CTRL key and
pressing “S”). Transmission from the serial control port can be restarted by
sending an XON (hexadecimal 11 or, on a terminal, by holding down the CTRL
key and pressing “Q”). The XON and XOFF entries take effect immediately
upon receipt by the serial control port. If the serial control port receives and

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 95
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 5: Serial Control Configuration and Operation

XOFF without a following XON, transmission will be automatically re-enabled


approximately 7½ seconds after the receipt of the last XOFF to avoid
inadvertent system lockup.

The Command Line


When using the serial control port, the routing system is controlled by means of
a Command Line (an ASCII string of up to 255 characters comprising one or
more individual instructions to the serial control port). The Command Line
offers the best compromise between manual operations via a data terminal and
automatic control via a computer.

Command Line Entry


A command line can be entered in either upper or lower case characters via a
data terminal or computer. The Echo Mode determines the response of the
router to the incoming data stream. If the Echo Mode is ON, the entered
characters are echoed back to the operator, and any error message is sent in its
entirety. If the Echo Mode is OFF, characters are not echoed, and only the error
number of an error message is sent to the operator. The entry of more than 255
characters, or the entry of any illegal character, will trigger an ERROR 2001
message and will cause the entire Command Line to be ignored. Editing of the
Command Line is limited to the use of a <BACKSPACE> to remove characters
from the Command Line (the <BACKSPACE> and the removed character are
not counted in the 255-byte entry limit), and to <ESC>, which aborts the current
string.

Command Syntax
Commands consist of a keyword followed by additional parameters, as needed.
Only the first letter of the keyword is actually required, and the keyword may be
preceded or followed by any number of spaces. Depending upon the actual
command, one or more parameters may be required. Leading spaces are allowed
for parameters (note that certain parameters may not include trailing spaces). A
space is not needed between the keyword and the first parameter, if the
parameter is numeric. However, a space is required after the keyword, if the
keyword is followed by an alphabetic parameter. Multiple numeric parameters
must be separated by commas or spaces. No delimiters are required between
multiple alphabetic parameters, or when a numeric parameter is followed by an
alphabetic parameter. Certain commands use field separators (e.g., the ‘/’ or ‘:’
characters) to divide the command into two or more subgroups.
Each distinct command is terminated by a semicolon, thus allowing more than
one command to be entered on each Command Line. The use of the semicolon
at the end of the last command in a Command Line is optional.

Order of Command Execution


No commands are executed until the Command Line has been completed (until
the carriage return has been pressed). The commands are then processed in the
order received. Control is not returned to the operator until all commands of the

96 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 5: Serial Control Configuration and Operation

current Command Line have been processed, all requested crosspoint operations
have been committed, and all transmissions and error messages have been
completed. When the serial port is ready to receive a new Command Line, a ‘>’
is transmitted as a prompt, regardless of the status of the Echo Mode.
Commands are processed in the order received, but they are not necessarily
executed in the order received. Requests to change crosspoints are buffered by
the router until processing of the current Command Line has been completed. At
that time, all crosspoint connection requests in that Command Line are taken
simultaneously, essentially creating a command line salvo.

Error Messages
Errors are grouped into three classes, shown by the first digit of the error code.
• Class 1 errors are typically fatal (i.e., the operation of the system is
suspended until the problem is corrected) and usually involve some failure
in the operation of the X-Y communications bus.
• Class 2 errors involve the entry or syntax of the Command Line and
generally indicate that a specific command or part of a command cannot be
properly executed.
• Class 3 errors typically indicate problems with a router frame or
interconnected system. Although Class 3 errors may invalidate router
configuration, they usually are not fatal to serial control port operation.
Table F-1 on page 190 provides a list of messages generated by all Harris
routers. Not all message types are generated by every frame, but all message
types are listed for completeness.

System Operations and Queries


Commands in the systems operations and queries group are used to set the Echo
Mode, list the current crosspoint connection status, obtain command syntax
information, and determine the system configuration. System operations and
queries are performed by executing the QUERY, INFORMATION, READ,
POLL, ZERO, and TERMINAL commands. You can find a description each
of these commands on the following pages.

Table 5-4. Harris Terminal Protocol System Operations Commands


Command Standard Module Enhanced Module
INFORMATION page 155 page 164
POLL page 155 page 164
QUERY page 155 page 164
READ page 155 page 164
TERMINAL page 160 page 165
ZERO page 160 page 165

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 97
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 5: Serial Control Configuration and Operation

Operation Using GVG TEN-XL ASCII Protocol


The ASCII interface mode is enabled by setting DIP switches as shown in
Figure 3-6 on page 68.

TEN-XL ASCII Serial Data Format


In TEN-XL ASCII protocol all words sent and received use the following
format.

Table 5-5. GVG TEN-XL ASCII Protocol Data Format


Data Format Description
Data rate DIP switch selectable
Default data rate 9600 baud rate
Data encoding 7 data bits
Odd parity
1 stop bit
Communications standard RS-232 or RS-422; jumper pack
selectable
Default communications standard RS-232

Definitions
Hexadecimal [hex] numbers are represented with the prefix ‘0x.’ For example:
• The hex equivalent of decimal ‘8’ is written ‘0x08.’
• The hex equivalent of decimal ‘12’ is written ‘0x0C.’
All internal crosspoint representations are ‘0’ based, which means that
crosspoint number 1 (or the first crosspoint) is represented internally as
crosspoint 0.
The TEN-XL ASCII protocol uses two reserved words, as shown in Table 5-6.

Table 5-6. ASCII Reserved Words


Reserved Word Hexadecimal Equivalent Control Character
STX 0x02 ^B
ENQ 0x05 ^E

TEN-XL ASCII Protocol: Programming Reference


TEN-XL ASCII protocol uses standard ASCII hex codes for the transmission of
commands. Programmers building command strings must use the hex
equivalent code in order to successfully convey commands from their
controlling software (controller) to the Panacea switcher (tributary).

98 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 5: Serial Control Configuration and Operation

Exceptions from the TEN-XL ASCII Protocol


Due to hardware differences between Panacea and TEN-XL routers, there are
differences in implementation for the Panacea.
The Panacea series supports more inputs (up to 12) compared to TEN-XL (up to
10 inputs) routers. To access sources beyond 10, the use of the data byte has
been expanded.

Table 5-7. Source to Data Byte Equivalents


Data Byte Corresponding Source
Internal Representation Hexadecimal Character
0x30 0 1
0x31 1 2
0x32 2 3
0x33 3 4
0x34 4 5
0x35 5 6
0x36 6 7
0x37 7 8
0x38 8 9
0x39 9 10
0x41 A 11 *
0x42 B 12 *

* Varies from standard TEN-XL implementation.


Since the Panacea series does not support power supply status reporting, the
POWER SUPPLY STATUS byte [PS] in the reply string will always return
[0x31], which is equivalent to [1].

String Structures
In addition, in the case of a WRITE or a TAKE command string, the reply is
held off until the crosspoint is physically taken by the switcher, up to a
maximum of 75 mSec. Any command string created must adhere to the
following string structures.
Write or Take Command String
[STX][AH][AL][VXPT][AXPT] All codes are adjacent to each other, and no spaces
are allowed.

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 99
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 5: Serial Control Configuration and Operation

Read or Query Command String

[STX][AH][AL][ENQ] All codes are adjacent to each other, and no spaces


are allowed.

Reply Command String

[VXPT][AXPT][PS] All codes are adjacent to each other, and no spaces


are allowed.

Table 5-8. ASCII Command Definitions


Command Definition
[STX] - (0x02) Standard ASCII hex code for Start of Transmission
[ENQ] - (0x05) Standard ASCII code for Enquiry
[VXPT] Video crosspoint coded as (0–9, A, B)
[corresponding ASCII hex codes (0x30–0x39,
0x41, 0x42)] 0 corresponds to crosspoint 1
[AXPT] Audio crosspoint coded as (0–9, A, B)
[corresponding ASCII hex codes (0x30–0x39,
0x41, 0x42)] 0 corresponds to crosspoint 1
[PS] Power Supply - fixed at 1 [corresponding ASCII
hex code 0x31]; meaning that power supply one
(the only one present) is active
[AH] * High order address - range of (0–9, A–F)
[corresponding ASCII hex codes (30–39, 41–46)]
[AL] * Low order address - range of (0–9, A–F)
[corresponding ASCII hex codes (30–39, 41–46)]

* [AH] combined with [AL] gives an address range of 0–FF.

100 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 5: Serial Control Configuration and Operation

TEN-XL ASCII Protocol: Examples


The following are examples of the TEN-XL ASCII protocol write and read
commands. They should serve as a guide to programmers using this protocol.

Input Selection - Follow Mode

Note
Issuing any command string, whether it is WRITE or READ,
always generates a reply from the switcher.

Result desired Switch to input 3 for both audio and video.


Premise The Panacea frame address is set to ‘00’ [all sw2 DIP switches in
the off position], and video input [3] and audio input [3] are
desired [Follow Mode].
Action Send this string from the controller to the switcher:
^B0022
Note that [^B] is equivalent to hex [0x02] or the Start of
Transmission [STX] code required at the beginning of the
WRITE string (refer to the “Write or Take Command String” on
page 99).
Effect After the crosspoints are asserted, the switcher responds with the
“Reply Command String.”
221
This translates to the video [3] and audio [3] crosspoints recently
asserted by the command string issued, and power supply status
[1] (refer to the “Reply Command String” on page 100).

Input Selection - Breakaway Mode


Result desired Switch to video input 12 and audio input 7.
Premise The Panacea frame address is set to ‘00’[all sw2 DIP switches in
the off position] and video input [12] and audio input [7] are
desired [Breakaway Mode].
Action Send the string from the controller to the switcher:
^B00B6
Note that [^B] is equivalent to hex [0x02]or the Start of
Transmission [STX] code required at the beginning of the write
string (refer to the “Write or Take Command String” on page 99).
Effect After the crosspoint is asserted, the switcher responds with the
‘Reply Command String:’
B61
This translates to the current video [12] and audio [7] crosspoints
asserted, and power supply status [1] (refer to the “Reply
Command String” on page 100).

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 101
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 5: Serial Control Configuration and Operation

Note
Character [B] in the Reply Command string is the last number in
the range of 12 possible crosspoints for the video crosspoint
parameter [VXPT]; hence, it is crosspoint [12] (refer to the “Reply
Command String” on page 100).

Frame Status Request


Result desired Get the Panacea frame’s crosspoint status.
Premise The Panacea frame address is set to ‘00’ and the video crosspoint
[3] and audio crosspoint [11] are asserted.
Action Send this string from the controller to the switcher:
^B00^E
Note that [^B] is equivalent to hex [0x02]or the Start of
Transmission [STX] code required at the beginning of the query
string, and that [^E] is equivalent to hex [0x05] or the Enquiry
[ENQ] code required at the end of a query string to execute the
command (refer to the “Write or Take Command String” on page
99).
Effect Switcher responds with “Reply Command String”
2A1
This translates to the current video [3] and audio [11] crosspoints
asserted, and power supply status [1] (refer to the “Reply
Command String” on page 100)

Note
Character [A] in the Reply Command string is the second to the
last number in the range of 12 possible crosspoints for the audio
crosspoint parameter [AXPT]; hence, it is crosspoint [11] (refer to
the “Reply Command String” on page 100)

102 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 5: Serial Control Configuration and Operation

Operation Using GVG TEN-XL SMPTE (Binary)


Protocol
The SMPTE interface mode is enabled by setting DIP switches as shown in
Figure 3-6 on page 68.

TEN-XL SMPTE Serial Data Format


In compliance with the SMPTE protocol, all words sent and received, with the
exception of the BREAK character, have the following format:

Table 5-9. GVG TEN-XL SMPTE Protocol Data Format


Data Format Description
Data rate DIP switch selectable
Default data rate 9600 baud rate
Data encoding 8 data bits
Even parity
1 stop bit
Communications standard RS-232 or RS-422; jumper pack
selectable
Default communications standard RS-232

Definition of the TEN-XL SMPTE Protocol


Figure 5-1 on page 104 shows the State Diagram used to define the SMPTE
protocol. The following subsections explain this protocol.

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 103
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 5: Serial Control Configuration and Operation

Figure 5-1. SMPTE Protocol State Diagram

TEN-XL SMPTE Protocol - Programming Reference


GVG TEN-XL SMPTE protocol is a binary protocol. Table 5-10 provides a
listing of several of the commands used in this protocol.

A Note on Standard Reserved Words


The TEN-XL SMPTE protocol uses a number of standard reserved words such
as ESC, ACK and NAK. Be careful not to confuse these words with the
standard ASCII definition of the reserved words.
In TEN-XL SMPTE protocol, the following definitions are used:

Table 5-10. SMPTE Reserved Words


Reserved Word TEN-XL SMPTE Definition
ESC 0x03
ACK 0x04
NAK 0x05

The BREAK character is a special attention character with the following


format:

104 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 5: Serial Control Configuration and Operation

Figure 5-2. Definition of a BREAK Character

Exceptions to TEN-XL SMPTE Protocol


Due to hardware differences between the Panacea routers and TEN-XL routers,
there are differences in the Panacea implementation.
1. Source Numbers for READ and WRITE commands: The Panacea Series
supports more inputs (up to 12) than the TEN-XL (up to 10 inputs) routers.
To provide access to sources beyond 10, the use of the data byte has been
expanded.
Note
[ADDR] is transmitted as two bytes. If [ADDR] is 0x80A0, it
would be sent as 0x80, 0xA0, where 0x80 is [ADDRHI] and
0xA0 is [ADDRLO].
2. Since the Panacea does not support power supply status reporting, the
POWER SUPPLY STATUS byte of the READ sequence [PS] will always
return 0x00.

Table 5-11. SMPTE Data Byte to Source Comparison


Data Byte Nibble Corresponding Source
0x01 1
0x02 2
0x03 3
0x04 4
0x05 5
0x06 6
0x07 7
0x08 8

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 105
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 5: Serial Control Configuration and Operation

Table 5-11. SMPTE Data Byte to Source Comparison (Continued)


Data Byte Nibble Corresponding Source
0x09 9
0x0A 10
0x0B 11 *
0x0C 12 *

* Varies from standard TEN-XL implementation.

Packet Structures
TEN-XL SMPTE protocol uses hex-coded packets for the transmission of
commands. Every command issued by the controlling software [controller]
causes a reply from the Panacea switcher [tributary]. Programmers building
command packets must adhere to the following packet structures.

Table 5-12. SMPTE Command Definitions


Command Hex Definition
[BREAK] Hardware A special attention character; see Figure 5-2
on page 105 for format
[ADDR] 0x8**0 SMPTE Address.
[ESC] 0x03 Escape is a Reserved Word.
[BC] 0x02 Byte Count is fixed at 0x02
[CMD] 0x41 or 0xC1 Command: Read fixed at 0x41 and Write fixed
at 0xC1
[DATA] Audio: upper nibble Data: Indicates the crosspoints to be selected,
Video: lower nibble. where audio is in the upper nibble and video in
the lower nibble
[CS] Any number Checksum: Calculated as the 2’s complement
of the addition of [BC], [CMD], [DATA], or
[XPT]. In the case of a Reply Sequence pack,
[PS] is also added before calculating the 2’s
complement
[XPT] Audio: upper nibble Crosspoint: Contains the current crosspoint
Video: lower nibble status for all existing levels (up to 2) in the
frame
[PS] 0x00 Power Supply: Set to 0 since power supply
reporting is not supported
[RESPONSE] See Table 5-14 on See Table 5-14 on page 107
page 107

** Determined by the SMPTE Address set on DIP Switch SW1.

106 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 5: Serial Control Configuration and Operation

Frame Status Request (Poll) Sequence Packet


[BREAK][ADDR+1] All codes are adjacent to each other, and no spaces
are allowed.

(The [ADDR+1] is a short-cut method utilized by the SMPTE protocol to get a


Poll without using a command byte. The command byte is incorporated into the
address byte, and the Poll command in represented by adding a “1” to the
SMPTE address in the last nibble.)

Table 5-13. SMPTE POLL Command


Command Hex Definition
[BREAK] Hardware A special attention character; see Figure 5-2 on
page 105 for format
[ADDR+1] 0x8**1 SMPTE address

** Determined by the SMPTE address set on DIP switch SW1.


Poll messages are initiated by the controller with the transmission of a BREAK
followed by a poll address, per the SMPTE standard. The SMPTE poll address
is one more than the device’s SMPTE select address. If the received address
matches the switcher polling address, it will respond with one of 4 characters.

Response Commands (to the Poll Sequence)


Table 5-14. Response to Poll Sequence
Response Explanation
RST (0x07) The switcher has been powered up or a reset
has occurred since the last poll.
NAK (0x05) A protocol error (time-out), parity (invalid
command) has occurred since the last poll.
SVC (0x08) A change in crosspoint or power supply status
has occurred since the last poll.
ACK (0x04) There has been no change in status since the
last poll.

Write Sequence Packet


[BREAK][ADDR][ESC][BC][CMD][DATA][CS] All codes are adjacent to
each other, and no spaces
are allowed

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 107
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 5: Serial Control Configuration and Operation

Table 5-15. SMPTE Write Command


Command Hex Definition
[BREAK] Hardware A special attention character; see Figure 5-2 on
page 105 for format
[ADDR] 0x8**0 SMPTE Address.
[ESC] 0x03 Escape is a Reserved Word.
[BC] 0x02 Byte Count is fixed at 0x02
[CMD] 0xC1 Command: Write fixed at 0xC1
[DATA] Audio: upper nibble Data: Indicates the crosspoints to be selected,
Video: lower nibble. where audio is in the upper nibble and video in
the lower nibble
[CS] Any number Checksum: Calculated as the 2’s complement
of the addition of [BC], [CMD], [DATA].

** Determined by the SMPTE address set on DIP switch SW1.


WRITE messages are initiated by the controller with the transmission of a
BREAK followed by a select address and five additional bytes. (Refer to
WRITE sequence.) If the packet is received properly, the switcher responds
with [ACK] (0x04).

(Long) Read Sequence Packet


a) [BREAK][ADDR][ESC][BC][CMD][DATA][CS] All codes are adjacent to
each other, and no spaces
are allowed

READ messages are initiated by the controller with the transmission of a


BREAK followed by a select address and five additional bytes; see (LONG)
Read Sequence packet, above.

Table 5-16. SMPTE Command Definitions


Command Hex Definition
[BREAK] Hardware A special attention character; see Figure 5-2 on
page 105 for format
[ADDR] 0x8**0 SMPTE Address.
[ESC] 0x03 Escape is a Reserved Word.
[BC] 0x02 Byte Count is fixed at 0x02
[CMD] 0x41 Command: Read fixed at 0x41
[DATA] Any number Value of [DATA] is ignored.
[CS] Any number Checksum: Calculated as the 2’s complement
of the addition of [BC], [CMD], [DATA].

108 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 5: Serial Control Configuration and Operation

** Determined by the SMPTE address set on DIP switch SW1. If the sequence from
“a)” is received correctly, the switcher will reply with [ACK]. The controller then sends
transmit enable [TEN].
b) [TEN] All codes are adjacent to each other, and no
spaces are allowed

Table 5-17. SMPTE Long Read Command


Command Hex Definition
[TEN] 0x09 Transmit/Enable: a Reserved Word.

The switcher will then respond with a reply sequence packet. See Item 7.

(Short) Read Sequence Packet


[BREAK][ADDR][TEN] All codes are adjacent to each other, and no
spaces are allowed

Table 5-18. SMPTE Short Read


Command Hex Definition
[BREAK] Hardware A special attention character; see Figure 5-2 on
page 105 for format
[ADDR] 0x8**0 SMPTE Address.
[TEN] 0x09 Transmit/Enable: a Reserved Word.

** Determined by the SMPTE address set on DIP switch SW1.


From the SMPTE protocol state diagram, it can be seen that this is a simpler
way to request the read response message.

Reply Sequence Packet


[ESC][BC][CMD][XPT][PS][CS] All codes are adjacent to each other, and no
spaces are allowed
.

Table 5-19. SMPTE Command Definitions


Command Hex Definition
[ESC] 0x03 Escape is a Reserved Word.
[BC] 0x03 Byte Count is fixed at 0x03
[CMD] 0xC1 Command: Fixed at 0xC1

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 109
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 5: Serial Control Configuration and Operation

Table 5-19. SMPTE Command Definitions (Continued)


Command Hex Definition
[XPT] Audio: upper nibble Indicates the crosspoint status, where audio is
Video: lower nibble. in the upper nibble and video in the lower
nibble
[PS] 0x00 Fixed at zero
[CS] Any number Checksum: Calculated as the 2’s complement
of the addition of [BC], [CMD], [XPT] and
[PS].

** Determined by the SMPTE address set on DIP switch SW1.

TEN-XL SMPTE Protocol: Examples


The following are examples of the TEN-XL SMPTE protocol commands. They
should serve as a guide to programmers using this protocol.

Frame Status Request (Poll)


Result desired Get the current frame status.
Premise The Panacea frame address is set to ‘8050’ and the Panacea
frame was recently powered up.
Action Send this string from the controller to the switcher:

Effect The switcher responds with


[RST] 0x07
The switcher has been powered up or a reset has occurred since
the last poll.

If any of the following Reply Commands occur, it could be because one of the
following conditions also exists, rather than the premise used in the above
example.

NAK (0x05) A protocol error (time-out, parity, invalid command) has


occurred since the last poll.
SVC (0x08) A change in crosspoint or power supply status has occurred
since the last poll.
ACK (0x04) There has been no change in status since the last poll.

110 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 5: Serial Control Configuration and Operation

Write Command Example


Result desired Selection of audio crosspoint 1 and video crosspoint 10
Premise The Panacea frame address is set to 10 which is ‘80A0’ and was
recently powered up.
Action Send this string from the controller to the switcher:

Effect The switcher responds with


[ACK] 0x04

(Long) Read Sequence Example


Result desired Crosspoint Status (long)
Premise The Panacea frame address is set to 10 which is ‘80A0’ and was
recently powered up.
Action 1 Send this string from the controller to the switcher:

Effect 1 The switcher responds with


[ACK] 0x04
Action 2 Send [TEN] 0x09 to the switcher.
Effect 2 The switcher responds with

Result description The crosspoint status by has the same format as the data byte of
the write command. This read response indicates audio
crosspoint four and video crosspoint three are selected.

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 111
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 5: Serial Control Configuration and Operation

(Short) Read Command Example


Result desired Crosspoint Status (Short)
Premise The Panacea frame address is set to 10 which is ‘80A0’and was
recently powered up.
Action 1 Send this string from the controller to the switcher:

Effect The switcher responds with

(This is the same six-byte response as the ‘Effect 2’ from


‘Action 2’ in the Read Sequence (Long) example.)

112 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 6
Troubleshooting Communications Issues

Overview
If experiencing communications issues (e.g., no control panel or serial port
control) on a Panacea frame, use this troubleshooting guide to verify proper
setup and configuration before contacting the Customer Service department.
Troubleshooting steps for a standard or an enhanced module are virtually
identical; however, any differences are indicated.
If you are not sure if a standard or an enhanced resource module is installed,
check the part number of the Panacea frame. (The part number can be found on
a sticker at the rear of the frame.) If the part number ends in an E, an enhanced
resource module is installed.
If communication problems still persist after you have checked the potential
trouble spots, contact the Customer Service department. When discussing your
issue with a Customer Service representative, mention that you have used this
checklist.

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 113
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 6: Troubleshooting Communications Issues

Checking Serial Settings (Standard and Enhanced


Resource Modules)
Checking the DIP Switches
The DIP switch settings determine the serial communications type (RS-232 or
R-S422), baud rate, and protocol type. For troubleshooting purposes, a PC with
an RS-232 port and RouterMapper is required. The latest version of
RouterMapper software can be downloaded from our website

Note
Older Panacea frames do not have hinges on the front panel. so
ensure the panel does not drop.

1. Remove the front panel from the Panacea frame and locate DIP switches
SW1, SW2, and SW3 as shown in Figure 6-1.

Figure 6-1. Panacea DIP Switch Locations

2. Make a note of the current DIP switch positions, and then place all the
switches in the down position as shown in the picture above. By placing all
the switches in the down position we can check whether there is a hardware
or configuration issue. With all switches down the serial port format is
RS-232 and the baud rate is 9600.
3. In RouterMapper, make sure the Comm Settings are configured for the
correct COMM port and for a baud rate of 9600. (See the RouterMapper
Configuration Utility Reference Guide for information on how to do this.)

114 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 6: Troubleshooting Communications Issues

4. Select Poll to see if RouterMapper can communicate with the Panacea


frame.
• If RouterMapper does not discover the Panacea frame, the modem cable
may be loose or disconnected. See “Checking the Modem Cable” on
page 115.
• If RouterMapper does discover the Panacea frame, the original DIP
switch settings must be examined to find why it does not communicate.
Pay particular attention to the following DIP switches:
• SW1, Pole 1: Program Mode switch
If the router stops responding when this switch is turned on to
Program mode, it probably has an invalid configuration provided.
See “Checking Programmed Configuration” on page 119.
• SW, Pole 2: Switching Level and Destination Offset
These DIP switches assign the switching level and destination
offset. They must correspond with the control panel configuration
and programming.
• SW3, Pole 1: RS-232/RS-422 Switch
Normally RS-422 mode is only used with Automation systems. If
the DIP switch is set for RS-422, make sure that the controlling PC
also communicates via an RS-422 port.
• SW3, Poles 5 and 6: Protocol Format
These two switches assign the protocol format. Leave these
switches off for Harris protocol. If these switches are set to a GVG
protocol format, RouterMapper will not be able to communicate.
• SW3, Poles 7 and 8: Baud Rate
These two switches assign the baud rate. If communications appear
to be intermittent, try changing the baud rate to a lower setting.

Checking the Modem Cable


When the serial format is RS-232, a null modem cable (with female connectors
on both ends) is used. Only three wires must be connected.
• Pins 2 and 3 crossed
• Pin 5 to Pin 5
Buzz out the null modem cable with a multi-meter to ensure these connections
are made.

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 115
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 6: Troubleshooting Communications Issues

Checking the Resource Module Ribbon Cable


A gray ribbon cable connects the P-MI module to the front panel resource
module on every Panacea frame. This ribbon cable provides power and the
communications line to the resource module. Make sure that the ribbon cable is
attached properly to both the P-MI board and the front panel resource module.
Pay careful attention to the connection on the P-MI (see Figure 6-2). Even if the
cable looks like it is connected properly, apply upward pressure to the
connection to ensure good contact; then, retry the communication.

Figure 6-2. Connecting the Ribbon Cable to the P-MI Module

If you suspect that the ribbon cable is faulty, you can order new ones. Use the
following part numbers:

P-2RU-CAB1 Ribbon cable for a Panacea 2RU frame


P-1RU-CAB1 Ribbon cable for a Panacea 1RU frame

116 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 6: Troubleshooting Communications Issues

Checking P-MI Module Placement


Occasionally the P-MI module may become slightly unseated from the back
plane and cause communication issues. Ensure that the P-MI is pushed tightly
into the back plane as shown in Figure 6-3. Even if the P-MI module appears to
be snug, apply forward pressure to the board; then, recheck communications.

Figure 6-3. Checking P-MI Module Placement

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 117
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 6: Troubleshooting Communications Issues

Checking X-Y and Genlock Connectors


If there are communications issues it may be possible that the X-Y and Genlock
cables are connected vertically to the rear of the Panacea frame instead of
diagonally, as shown in Figure 6-4. (This may also produce the symptom of no
vertical interval switching if an X-Y cable is connected to the genlock BNC. If
using a Panacea clean/quiet switch, P16SCQ, then it may also produce green
flashes in the video.)

Figure 6-4. X-Y/Genlock Connector Orientation

118 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 6: Troubleshooting Communications Issues

Checking Programmed Configuration


If the serial port can be communicated with but the control panel cannot control
it, then the Panacea may not be configured properly. This will normally only
occur when DIP switch SW1-1 is set to the On position for Program mode.

Note
See Appendix B: “Terminal Operation” for detailed information
about how to set up a communication session via HyperTerminal
or Telnet.

1. Open a communications session with a program such as HyperTerminal (or


Telnet for Ethernet connections) and connect to the Panacea frame. Ensure
the correct COMM port and baud rate are set in HyperTerminal. The Bits
per second field is the baud rate and must match the baud rate set by DIP
switches SW3-7 and 3-8 on the resource module. The other parameters
(Data bits, Parity, Stop bits, and Flow Control) must appear as shown in
Figure 6-5.

Figure 6-5. Panacea Parameters

2. At the > prompt, type show offsets. Something similar to the information
shown below should appear.
> show offsets
Frame Offsets:
First Level 0
First Source 1
First Destination 1
>

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 119
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 6: Troubleshooting Communications Issues

3. If the level, source, or destination does not match that what is expected, use
the following commands to set the correct values at the > prompt:
set firstlevel=# — In this command, “#” is the desired switching level; it is
normally set to 0 for video, 1 for audio.
set firstsource=# — In this command, “#” is the desired starting source; it
is normally set for 1.
set firstdestination=# — In this command, “#” is the desired starting
destination; it is normally set for 1.
4. (Enhanced modules only) After the correct settings have been entered, type
save mp at the > prompt to save these changes permanently.
5. Determine if Combiner Mode is turned on or off. Combiner mode should
only be turned if the Panacea is part of a larger combiner system.
At the > prompt, type show combiner. Something similar to the
information shown below will appear.
> show combiner
Frame is in Program Mode. Combiner settings are
Active.
Current Combiner Settings:
Mode = Primary Frame
Blocksize = 16
Number of Blocks = 2
>
If the combiner settings are Active, type set combinermode=n at the >
prompt to disable Combiner Mode.
Recheck to see if the panel can now control the frame. Note that the panel must
also be properly programmed to control the levels, sources, and destinations as
defined in step 3 on page 120.

120 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 6: Troubleshooting Communications Issues

Checking Ethernet Settings (Enhanced Modules


Only)
When troubleshooting Ethernet problems, first make sure that communication
can be established with the serial port. If not, go back to Checking Serial
Settings (Standard and Enhanced Resource Modules) starting on page 114.
1. At the serial port, type show ipdisplay at the > prompt. The following will
appear:
>show ipdisplay
Active:
Ip Address: 192.168.100.250
Gateway Address: 192.168.100.1
Netmask Address: 255.255.255.0
Mac address 00-90-F9-00-3B-35
Stored:
Ip Address: 192.168.100.250
Gateway Address: 192.168.100.1
Netmask Address: 255.255.255.0
Mac address 00-90-F9-00-3B-35
2. Make sure the IP address, gateway address, and subnet mask settings
correct. If not, use the following commands to configure these settings.
set ip1=xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
set gateway1=xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
set netmask1=xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
After the settings have been made, type save sysconfig at the > prompt to
permanently store these settings.
3. Verify the maximum number of allowed Ethernet connections.
At the > prompt type, show vxyconnections, and the information similar to
the following will appear:
> show vxyconnections
VIRTUALXY SYSTEM INFORMATION
Maximum Number of Connections = 4
Connections:
This information displays the maximum number of Ethernet clients that
may control the frame. “Clients” are products, such as an Ethernet control
panel, RouterWorks software, or Pilot/Navigator software. The maximum
number of connections should be at least 1 higher then the expected number
of clients. For example, if you anticipate up to 4 clients on your system set
the maximum number of connections to 5. The upper limit is 12.
To change the maximum number of connections, type set
tmaxconnections=#, where # is anywhere between 2 and 12. To
permanently save this setting, type save sysconfig at the > prompt.

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 121
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 6: Troubleshooting Communications Issues

4. Connect your PC to the Panacea frame. If connecting directly from the PC


to the Panacea, a crossover Ethernet cable is required, or use two straight
cables with a hub or switch.
5. From a Windows Command prompt, try to ping the IP address of the
Panacea frame.
• If you can ping it, go to step 6.
• If you cannot ping the Panacea frame, the cables and/or the PC setup
must be verified.
• Ensure that a good wire connection is being made by checking that
the green LED on the Ethernet port is on.
• Also check the green connection LED on the switch or hub.
Ensure that the PC has a valid IP address and is on the same subnet as the
Panacea frame. If you are not sure how to do this, check with your IT
department.
6. If you cannot communicate to the Panacea frame with an Ethernet control
panel, make sure the panel is pointing to the correct IP address. From the
serial port of the control panel, type set server=<IP address of Panacea>.
7. If using RouterWorks, make sure that the correct IP address for the Panacea
frame is configured in the Comm Settings menu in RouterMapper first, as
shown below, before launching RouterWorks.

Figure 6-6. RouterMapper Comm Settings Menu

122 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 7
Specifications

This chapter contains following specification tables:


• Frame
• “Electrical Specifications,” page 124
• “Mechanical Specifications,” page 124
• “Frame Input/Output Signal Specifications,” page 125
• Analog Audio Modules
• “Analog Audio Input Specifications,” page 126
• “Analog Audio Output Specifications,” page 126
• “Analog Audio 66Ω Performance Specifications,” page 127
• “Analog Audio 600Ω Performance Specifications,” page 127
• Analog Video Modules
• “Analog Video Input Specifications,” page 128
• “Analog Video Output Specifications,” page 128
• “Analog Video Performance Specifications,” page 129
• Multirate/Standard Definition Modules
• “HS/S Input Specifications,” page 130
• “HS/S Output Specifications,” page 130
• “HS/S Performance Specifications,” page 131
• 3 Gb Serial Digital Video Modules
• “3 Gb Input Specifications” on page 132
• “3 Gb Output Specifications” on page 132
• “3 Gb Performance Specifications” on page 133
• Clean/Quiet Switch Modules
• “P16SCQ/P16HSCQ Input Specifications,” page 134
• “P16SCQ/P16HSCQ Output Specifications,” page 134
• “P16SCQ/P16HSCQQ Performance Specifications,” page 135
• AES Audio Modules
• “AES Audio Input Specifications,” page 136
• “AES Audio Output Specifications,” page 136
• “AES Audio Performance Specifications,” page 137
All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 123
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 7: Specifications

Frame Specifications
Table 7-1. Electrical Specifications
Item Specification
Input
1RU 1RU portable desktop power supply (rear
mount AC or DC power supply module
available as an option)
2RU 2RU portable desktop power supply (rear
mount AC or DC power supply module
available as an option)
Desktop power supply Universal input
1RU 47-63 Hz, 70 W
100-240 VAC
2RU 47-63 Hz, 130 W
100 – 240 VAC

Output 15 VDC
Total power
1RU 70 W
2RU 105 W
Performance temperature 41° – 104°F (5° – 40°C)
Operating temperature 32° – 122°F (0° – 50°C)

Table 7-2. Mechanical Specifications


Item Specification
Size
1RU 19 in.×5.25 in.×1.75 in.
(48.3 cm×13.3 cm×44 cm)
2RU 19 in.×5.25 in.×3.5 in.
(48.3 cm×13.3 cm×88 cm)
Weight (fully loaded)
1RU 5 lb (2.3 kg)
2RU 7 lb (3.2 kg)
Indicators
Standard resource module Power/alarm LED
Enhanced resource module Power/alarm LED
Data LED
Cooling (only in HD and analog audio) Forced air/convection

124 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 7: Specifications

Table 7-3. Frame Input/Output Signal Specifications


Item Specification
RS-232/RS-422 serial communication DB-9 pin connector
Alarm/comm port Harris 3-pin connector
X-Y (coaxial communication) 75Ω BNC
Sync 75Ω BNC
Ethernet RJ-45

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 125
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 7: Specifications

Module Specifications
Analog Audio
Table 7-4. Analog Audio Input Specifications
Item Specification
Number of inputs 8, 16, or 32
Signal type Balanced analog audio
Impedance
66Ω High Z (20 kΩ)
600Ω 600Ω
Connector DB-25
CMRR
66Ω > 70 dB rejection, 20 Hz to 20 kHz
600Ω > 65 dB rejection, 20 Hz to 20 kHz typical
> 60 dB worst case
Nominal input level +8 dBm
Maximum level
66Ω +28 dBu
600Ω +20 dBm

Table 7-5. Analog Audio Output Specifications


Item Specification
Number of outputs 1, 4, 8, 16, or 32
Signal type Balanced analog audio
Impedance 66Ω or 600Ω
Connector DB-25
Maximum level +28 dBu (66Ω)
+20 dBm (600Ω)
DC output level ± 50 mV maximum
Maximum cable length 328 ft (100 m) of Belden 8451 or equivalent
Minimum load 600Ω

126 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 7: Specifications

Table 7-6. Analog Audio 66Ω Performance Specifications


Item Specification
Gain Unity, ± 0.1 dB
THD+N* < 0.01% at 28 dBu
< 0.005% , typical
IMD (SMPTE 4:1) < 0.005%, +24 dBu, typical
< 0.01%, worst case
Crosstalk Better than –85 dB, typical
Better than –80 dB, worst case
Frequency response < –3 dB to 200 kHz
< ± 0.15 dB, 20 Hz to 20 kHz
S/N ratio Better than –105 dB typical
Better than –100 dB worst case
Performance temperature 41° to 104°F (5° to 40°C)
Operating temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
*
THD+N increases as matrix size and/or number of destinations increase. The worst case is a
128×64 stereo system or a 128×128 mono system with all destinations set to a single source.
In this worst case, the THD+N is < 0.025%, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, +28 dBu, with a High Z load.

Table 7-7. Analog Audio 600Ω Performance Specifications


Item Specification
Gain Unity, ± 0.15 dB
THD+N < 0.01%, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, +20 dBm
< 0.005% , typical
IMD (SMPTE 4:1) < 0.001%, +20 dBm
< 0.02%,typical
Crosstalk > 80 dB isolation, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, all
hostile, typical
> 95 dB isolation, worst case
Frequency response < ± 0.15 dB, 20 Hz to 20 kHz*
–3 dB point: > 200 kHz
S/N ratio > 100 dB ref. to +28 dBu
20 Hz to 20 kHz, typical
Performance temperature 41° to 104°F (5° to 40°C)
Operating temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
* Frequency response in 600Ω version with 328 ft (100 m) of cable will be – dB @ 20 kHz, –14

dB @ 200 kHz, into a 600Ω load.

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 127
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 7: Specifications

Analog Video
Table 7-8. Analog Video Input Specifications
Item Specification
Number of inputs 8, 16, or 32
Signal type Composite or component analog video, or
any video or RF signal within the voltage
and frequency limits
Connector 75Ω BNC per IEC 169-8
Signal coupling DC
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss > 45 dB at 5 MHz
> 35 dB at 20 MHz
> 18 dB at 250 MHz
Normal input level 1.0 Vp-p
Maximum level 3.0 Vp-p centered at 0 V

Table 7-9. Analog Video Output Specifications


Item Specification
Number of outputs 1, 4, 8, 16, or 32
Signal type Composite or component analog video, or
any video or RF signal within the voltage
and frequency limits
Connector 75Ω BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Return loss > 45 dB at 5 MHz
> 35 dB at 20 MHz
> 18 dB at 250 MHz
Normal level 1.0 Vp-p
Maximum level 3.0 Vp-p centered at 0 V
Tilt 0.1%

128 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 7: Specifications

Table 7-10. Analog Video Performance Specifications


Item Specification
DC offset < ± 50 mV
Input to input gain Unity ± 0.15 dB
Frequency response ± 0.1 dB from DC to 20 MHz
± 0.5 dB from 20 to 50 MHz
+ 2 dB to –3 dB from 50 to 200 MHz
Crosstalk > 65 dB typical
> 60 worst case
Differential gain < 0.15% at 3.58 MHz and 4.43 MHz
Differential phase < 0.15 degree at 3.58 MHz and 4.43 MHz
Phase scatter < ± 1° input to input
Signal to noise > 65 dB 5 MHz
Power consumption 35 W
Performance temperature 41° to 104°F (5° to 40°C)
Operating temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 129
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 7: Specifications

Multirate/Standard Definition/Clean Switch


Table 7-11. HS/S Input Specifications
Item Specification
Number of inputs 16
Connector 75Ω BNC per IEC 169-8
Signal type SMPTE 259M, SMPTE 344M, and
SMPTE 292M signal formats
(HS only) Frequency limited -
3.072 Mb/s to 1.485 Gb/s
Normal input level 800 mVp-p ±10%
Maximum input level 1200 mV
Return loss Better than –20 dB (5 MHz to 540 MHz)
Better than –18 dB (540 MHz to 1.485
GHz)
Equalization Automatic
270 Mb/s 1,100 ft (335 m) Belden 1694A
1.485 Gb/s (HS only) 400 ft (122 m) Belden 1694A

Table 7-12. HS/S Output Specifications


Item Specification
Number of outputs 1, 4, 8, 16, or 32
Connector 75Ω BNC per IEC 169-8
Signal type SMPTE 259M, SMPTE 344M, and
SMPTE 292M signal formats
Reclocking Automatic for all SMPTE-defined data
rates
Pass-thru for all nonstandard clock rates
Output amplitude 800 mV-p±10%
Return loss Better than –20 dB (5 MHz to 540 MHz)
Better than –18 dB (540 MHz to 1.485
GHz)
Slew rate
SD/ASI 400-700 pS
HD <270 pS
Overshoot < 10% of amplitude
Jitter < 0.2 UI @ frequency tested

130 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 7: Specifications

Table 7-13. HS/S Performance Specifications


Item Specification
DC offset 0 ± 0.5 V
Power consumption
16×16 25 W
32×32 50 W
Propagation delay < 4.5 nS P16xn S (270 Mb/s)
< 13 nS P16xn SR (270 Mb/s)
< 5.5 nS P32xn S (270 Mb/s)
< 13.5 nS P-32xn SR (270 Mb/s)
Performance temperature 41° to 104°F (5° to 40°C)
Operating temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 131
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 7: Specifications

3 Gb Serial Digital Video


Table 7-14. 3 Gb Input Specifications
Item Specification
Number of inputs 8, 16, or 32
Connector 75Ω BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Signal type SMPTE 259M, SMPTE 344M,
SMPTE 292M, SMPTE 424, DVB-ASI
Most other <1 Vp-p digital NRZ/NRZI
signals, 3 Mb/s to 3.0 Gb/s
Maximum input amplitude 880 mV
Nominal input amplitude 800 mV±10%
Return loss Better than 18 dB, to 270 Mb/s
Better than 16 dB, to 1.5 Gb/s
Better than 12 dB, to 3.0 Gb/s
Equalization Automatic
270 Mb/s 1,148 ft (350 m) Belden 1694A
1.485 Gb/s 492 ft (150 m) Belden 1694A
2.97 Gb/s 328 ft (100 m) Belden 1694A

Table 7-15. 3 Gb Output Specifications


Item Specification
Number of outputs 4, 8, 16, or 32
Connector 75Ω BNC per IEC 169-8
Impedance 75Ω
Signal type SMPTE 259M, SMPTE 344M,
SMPTE 292M, SMPTE 424, DVB-ASI
Most other <1 Vp-p digital NRZ/NRZI
signals, 3 Mb/s to 3.0 Gb/s
Maximum output amplitude 880 mV
Nominal output amplitude 800 mV ± 10%
Reclocking Automatic for 270 Mb/s, 1.485 Gb/s, and
2.97 Gb/s
Pass-thru for all nonstandard clock rates
Return loss Better than 18 dB, to 270 Mb/s
Better than 16 dB, to 1.5 Gb/s
Better than 12 dB, to 3.0 Gb/s
Slew rate <135 pS
DC offset 0 ± 0.5 V
Overshoot < 10% of amplitude
Jitter < 0.3 UI @ frequency tested

132 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 7: Specifications

Table 7-16. 3 Gb Performance Specifications


Item Specification
Power consumption 50W with reclock modules
25W with bridge modules
Propagation delay (for reference only) < 7 nS with reclock modules
< 5 nS with bridge modules
Performance temperature 41° to 104°F (5° to 40°C)
Operating temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 133
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 7: Specifications

Clean/Quiet Switch
Table 7-17. P16SCQ/P16HSCQ Input Specifications
Item Specification
Number of inputs 16
Connector 75Ω BNC per IEC 169-8
Signal type SMPTE 259M and SMPTE 292M signal
formats
Maximum input level 1200 mV
Return loss Better than –20 dB (5 MHz to 540 MHz)
Better than –18 dB (540 MHz to 1.485
GHz)
Equalization Auto
270 Mb/s (SD only) 984 ft (330 m) Belden 1694A
1.485 Gb/s (HS only) 328 ft (120 m) Belden 1694A

Table 7-18. P16SCQ/P16HSCQ Output Specifications


Item Specification
Number of outputs 2 clean 6 aux
Connector 75Ω BNC per IEC 169-8
Signal type SMPTE 259M and SMPTE 292M signal
formats
Reclocking Automatic for all SMPTE-defined data
rates
Pass-thru for all nonstandard clock rates
Return loss Better than –20 dB (5 MHz to 540 MHz)
Better than –18 dB (540 MHz to 1.485
GHz)
Jitter < 0.2UI @ frequency tested
Output amplitude 800 mVp-v ± 10%
DC offset 0 ± 0.5V
Rise / fall time
270 Mb/s (SD only) 400 — 1500 ps
1.485 Gb/s (HS only) < 270 ps

134 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 7: Specifications

Table 7-19. P16SCQ/P16HSCQQ Performance Specifications


Item Specification
Power consumption
16×2 = 50W
Performance temperature 41° to 104°F (5° to 40°C)
Operating temperature 32° to 158°F (0° to 70°C)

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 135
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 7: Specifications

AES Audio
Table 7-20. AES Audio Input Specifications
Item Specification
Balanced I/O Coaxial I/O
Type Balanced, transformer AC coupled
coupled
Qty. (signals) 32, 16, or 8 32, 16, or 8
Qty. (reference) One, terminated One, looping
Connector (signals) DB-25 BNC
Connector (reference) Removable terminal strip BNC
Impedance 110Ω 75Ω
Return loss N/A >30 dB, 0.1 MHz to 6 MHz
>25 dB, 6 MHz to 12 MHz
Signal amplitude 0.2 Vp-p to 7 Vp-p 0.1 Vp-p to 2 Vp-p

Table 7-21. AES Audio Output Specifications


Item Specification
Balanced I/O Coaxial I/O
Type Balanced, transformer Unbalanced
coupled
Quantity 32, 16, 8, 4, or 1 32, 16, 8, 4, or 1
Connector DB-25 BNC
Impedance 110Ω 75Ω
Return loss N/A > 35 dB, 0.1 MHz to 6 MHz
> 25 dB, 6 MHz to 12 MHz
Signal amplitude 5 Vp-p ± 1 V into 110Ω load 1.0 Vp-p ± 10% into 75Ω
load
DC offset 0.0 V ± 50 mV 0.0 V ± 50 mV
Rise / fall time 5 ns to 30 ns 30 ns to 44 ns

136 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 7: Specifications

Table 7-22. AES Audio Performance Specifications


Item Specification
Propagation delay < 170 ns, asynchronous mode
< 1.5 AES frames, synchronous or SQS
modes
Intrinsic jitter < 5 ns
Switching type Asynchronous, synchronous, or
synchronous quiet switching (SQS)
AES frame rates 30 kHz – 192 kHz in asynchronous mode
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, or 48 kHz in
synchronous or SQS mode
Data rates Up to 30Mb/s, 50% duty cycle,
asynchronous mode
Power consumption < 20 W
Performance temperature 41°F to 104°F (5°C to 40°C)
Operating temperature 32°F to 122°F (0° to 50°C)

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 137
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 7: Specifications

138 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix A
Safety Precautions, Certifications, and
Compliances

Overview
Carefully observe the safety alert symbols below for dangers, warnings, and
cautions. They alert installers and operators of possible dangers or important
information contained in this manual.
Keep in mind, though, that warnings alone do not eliminate hazards, nor are
they a substitute for safe operating techniques and proper accident prevention
measures.
Any user-serviceable components (such as fuses or batteries) are only
replaceable by those components listed in the manual.
IMPORTANT! Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures.

Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual 139
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix A: Safety Precautions, Certifications, and Compliances

Safety Terms and Symbols in this Manual

Warning
Statements identifying conditions or practices that may
result in personal injury or loss of life. High voltage is
present.

Caution
Statements identifying conditions or practices that can result in
damage to the equipment or other property.

Safety Terms and Symbols on the Product


DANGER: High voltage and indicates a personal injury hazard
immediately accessible as one reads the marking.

WARNING: Indicates a personal injury hazard not immediately


accessible as one reads the marking.

CAUTION: Indicates a hazard to property, including the product, or to


pay attention and refer to the manual.

Protective ground (earth) terminal.

Fuse. Replace with same type and rating of fuse.


Zur Vermeidung von Feuer verwenden Sie nur Sicherungen mit der für
dieses Produkt geforderten Typ und Stromstärke.

140 Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix A: Safety Precautions, Certifications, and Compliances

Preventing Electrostatic Discharge


Observe precautions for handling electrostatic sensitive devices.
CAUTION: Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage components in the
product. To prevent ESD, observe these precautions when directed to do so:
1. Use a Ground Strap. Wear a grounded antistatic wrist strap to discharge
the static voltage from your body while installing or removing sensitive
components.
2. Use a Safe Work Area. Do not use any devices capable of generating or
holding a static charge in the work area where you install or remove
sensitive components. Avoid handling sensitive components in areas that
have a floor or benchtop surface capable of generating a static charge.
3. Handle Components Carefully. Do not slide sensitive components over
any surface. Do not touch exposed connector pins. Handle sensitive
components as little as possible.
4. Transport and Store Carefully. Transport and store sensitive
components in a static-protected bag or container.

Injury Precautions
WARNING
Potentially lethal voltages are present within the frame during normal
operation. The AC power cord must be disconnected from the frame before
the top panel is removed. (In frames with multiple power supplies, remove
ALL power cords.) Power should not be applied to the frame while the top
is open unless properly trained personnel are servicing the unit.
Pull out the plug from the main socket before the removal of a cover.
Przod zdjeciem pokrywy wyciagnac wtyczke z gniazda sieciowego.
WARNING: SHOCK HAZARD - DO NOT OPEN.
AVIS: RISQUE DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE - NE PAS OUVRIR.
MOUNT IN RACK ONLY
INSTALLER SUR SUPPORT DE MONTAGE SEULEMENT.
Use proper power cord
To avoid fire hazard, use only the power cord specified for this product.

Ground the product


This is a Safety Class 1 product and is grounded through the grounding
conductor of the power cord. To avoid electrical shock, the grounding
conductor must be connected to earth ground. Before making connections
to the product’s input or output terminals, ensure the product is properly
grounded.
WARNING: THIS APPLIANCE MUST BE GROUNDED.
WARNING: THIS APPLIANCE MUST BE EARTHED.
VARNING: APPARATEN SKALL ANSLUTAS TILL JORDAT UTTAG
NÄR DEN ANSLUTS TILL ETT NÄTVERK.

Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual 141
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix A: Safety Precautions, Certifications, and Compliances

Do Not Operate Without Covers


To avoid electrical shock or fire hazard, do not operate this product with
covers or panels removed.
Use Proper Fuse
To avoid fire hazard, use only the fuse type and rating specified for this
product.
Do Not Operate in Wet/Damp Conditions
To avoid injury or fire hazard, do not operate this product in wet or damp
conditions.
Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere
To avoid injury or fire hazard, do not operate this product in an explosive
atmosphere.
Avoid Exposed Circuitry
To avoid injury, remove jewelry such as rings, watches, and other metallic
objects. Do not touch exposed connections and components when power is
present.

Product Damage Precautions


CAUTION:
Disconnect power from the frame before removing or installing input/
output modules. Removing or installing modules with power applied could
cause serious damage to system components.
Use Proper Power Source
Do not operate this product from a power source that supplies more than the
specified voltage.
Use Proper Voltage Settings
Before applying power, ensure that the line selector is in the proper position
for the power source being used.
Provide Proper Ventilation
To prevent product overheating, provide proper ventilation.

Do Not Operate With Suspected Failures


If you suspect there is damage to this product, have it inspected by qualified
service personnel.
CAUTION: This unit can have more than one power supply cord. To
de-energize the internal circuitry, you have to disconnect all power cords.
ADVARSEL: Utstyret kan ha mere ennn en tilførselsledning. For å gjore
interne deler spennigsløse må alle tilførselsledningene trekkes ut.
VARNING: Denna apparat har mer än en nätanslutning. Samtliga nätkablar
måste bortkopplas för att göra de interna kretsarna spänningsfria.

142 Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix A: Safety Precautions, Certifications, and Compliances

FUSE: REPLACE WITH SAME TYPE AND RATING OF FUSE.


CAUTION: REPLACE WITH SAME TYPE FUSE.
ATTENTION: UTILISER UN FUSIBLE DE RECHANGE DE MÊME
TYPE.
CAUTION: DISCONNECT SUPPLY CORD BEFORE CHANGING
FUSE.
ATTENTION: DÉBRANCHER AVANT DE REMPLACER LE
FUSIBLE.
ACHTUNG: VOR AUSWECHSELN DER SICHERUNG IST DAS
GERÄT VOM NETZ ZU TRENNEN.
CAUTION
Disconnect power from the frame before removing or installing input/
output modules. Removing or installing modules with power applied could
cause serious damage to system components.
Use Proper Power Source
Do not operate this product from a power source that supplies more than the
specified voltage.

Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual 143
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix A: Safety Precautions, Certifications, and Compliances

EMC and Safety Standards


This product has been tested and found to comply with the following
IEC, FCC, UL, ICES, and CSA standards, per the provision of the
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89/336/EEC of 3 May 1989 as
amended by 92/31EEC of 28 April 1992 and 93/68/EEC, Article 5 of 22
July 1993, and the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC of 19 February
1973.

EMC Standards

Table A-1. EMC Standards


EMC Standard Description
EN55014 Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio Disturbance Characteristics of Electric
Motor-Operated and Thermal Appliances for Household and Similar Purposes,
Electric Tools, and Similar Electric Apparatus
EN55022 Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio Disturbance Characteristics of
Information Technology Equipment-Class A
EN55103-1 Electromagnetic Compatibility — Product Family Standard for Audio, Video,
Audio-Visual, and Entertainment Lighting Control Apparatus for Professional Use —
Part 1: Emission, Environment E4
EN55103-2 Electromagnetic Compatibility — Product Family Standard for Audio, Video,
Audio-Visual, and Entertainment Lighting Control Apparatus for Professional Use —
Part 2: Immunity, Environment E4
EN61000-3-2 Limits for Harmonic Current Emissions (Equipment Input Current Less Than or Equal
to 16 A Per Phase)
EN61000-3-3 Limitations of Voltage Fluctuations and Flicker in Low Voltage Supply Systems for
Equipment with Rated Current Less Than 16 A
EN61000-4-2 Electrostatic Discharge Requirements “ESD” 2 kV CD, 4 kV AD
EN61000-4-3 Radiated Radio-Frequency Electromagnetic Field Immunity Test 1 V/m {1 kHz 80%
AM, 80-1000 MHz}
EN61000-4-4 Electrical Fast Transient Requirements “Burst,” 0.5 kV Sig. & Ctrl. Lines 0.5 kV a.c.
& d.c. Power Line, 0.5 kV Functional Earth
EN61000-4-5 Surge Immunity Test 0.5 kV a.c. Power Line
EN61000-4-6 Immunity to Conducted Disturbances Induced by Radio Frequency Fields 1 V rms
0.15-80 MHz Sig. & Ctrl. Lines, 3 V rms 0.15-80 MHz d.c. Power Line, 1 V rms
0.15-80 MHz a.c. Power Line, 1 V rms 0.15-80 MHz Functional Earth
EN61000-4-11 Voltage Dips, Short Interruptions, and Voltage Variations- Immunity Tests

144 Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix A: Safety Precautions, Certifications, and Compliances

These devices are for professional use only and comply with Part 15 of
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. These devices may cause interference to radio and TV receivers in


residential areas.
2. These devices will accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operations.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Harris Corporation,
the party responsible for compliance to the FCC Part 15 Rule, could void
the user’s authority to operate this equipment legally in the United States.
These devices do not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions
from digital apparatus as set out in the interference standard entitled
“Digital apparatus,” ICES-003 of the Canadian Department of
Communications.

Additional EMC Information


This device is for professional use in a controlled EMC environment, such as
purpose-built broadcast studios.
EMC regulations require that the radiation emitted from this unit does not
exceed certain limits. These limits are only met when the front panel is closed
and the two thumb screws are secured.
Compliance to the EMC regulations is also dependent on the use of suitably
shielded (screened) cables. Coax cables should be of the double-shielded
(screened) variety. Unused BNCs should be fitted with 75Ω terminations.
All audio cables should be screened with the shield (screen) making good
contact with the metallic parts of the cable connectors.
D-type connectors used with this unit should always have metallic shells with
the shield (screen) of the cable mechanically bonded to the metal shell. It is
further recommended that the D-type cable connectors be of the “dimple”
variety. These connectors make a better contact and consequently improve EMC
performance.

Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual 145
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix A: Safety Precautions, Certifications, and Compliances

Safety Standards
Table A-2. Harmonized and Reference IEC Safety Standards
Harmonized Standard Reference IEC Standard Description
EN 60950:1992 with IEC 60950:1991 (Modified) Safety of Information Technology Equipment
Am1, Am 2, Am 3,
Am4, A11
amendments
EN 60950 IEC 60950:1999 (Modified) Safety of Information Technology Equipment
IEC 60950-1 (2001-10) Information Technology Equipment Safety—
Part 1: General Requirements
EN 60065 IEC 60065: 1998 (Modified) Audio, Video, and Similar Electronic Apparatus
6th Edition Safety Requirements
IEC 60065 (2001) Audio, Video, and Similar Electronic Apparatus
7th Edition Safety Requirements
Amendment 1 to IEC 60065 Audio, Video, and Similar Electronic Apparatus
7th Edition Safety Requirements
EN 60825-1:1999 IEC 60825-1:1993 Safety of Laser Products—Part 1: Equipment Classification,
Requirements, and User's Guide
EN 60825-2:2000 IEC 60825-2:2000 Safety of Laser Products—Part 2: Safety of Optical
Fibre Communication Systems
IEC 60825-1 (2001-08) Safety of Laser Products—Part 1: Equipment
Edition 1.2 Classification, Requirements, and User's Guide
UL 1419 2nd Edition Standard for Professional Video and Audio Equipment
(March 28, 1997
UL 6500 (September 2nd Edition Standard for Audio/Video and Musical Instrument
30, 1999) Apparatus for Household, Commercial, and Similar
General Use
UL 60950 (December 3rd Edition Safety of Information Technology Equipment
1, 2000)
CAN/CSA-C22.2 Safety of Information Technology Equipment
No. 60950-00 (Bi-National Standard, with UL 60950)
CAN/CSA- Audio, Video and Similar Electronic Apparatus
E60065-00 Safety Requirements (Adopted IEC 60065:1998,
6th Edition, with Canadian Deviations)
CAN/CSA-C22.2 Audio, Video, and Similar Electronic Equipment
No. 1-98
CSA C22.2 Audio, Video, and Similar Electronic Equipment
No. 1-98 including
Am1 (June, 2003)

146 Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix B
Terminal Operation

Overview
A separate serial control port is used to control a Panacea from an external
computer or automation system. The serial port may be used to monitor the
system configuration, determine the current status of crosspoint connections,
change crosspoint connections in any matrix, and setup pre-programmed
crosspoint takes sequences, or salvos. These (and other) operations are assigned
to the serial port via a series of commands called “terminal operation”
commands.
• You can find a list of the terminal commands available for the Panacea
standard module starting on page 153.
• You can find a list of the terminal commands available for the Panacea
enhanced module starting on page 161.

Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual 147
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix B: Terminal Operation

Establishing a Terminal Operation Session


Before you configure your Panacea product, you will need to initiate a terminal
operation session. You need to determine which type of setup you will use:
• For a standalone system with serial connections, see “Establishing a
Terminal Operation Session for Serial Control Interface Products” on page
149.
• For a standalone system with Ethernet connections, see “Establishing a
Telnet Session for Ethernet Control Interface Products” on page 150.
• For a network system with serial connections see “Establishing a Terminal
Operation Session for Serial Control Interface Products” on page 149 and
“Network Configuration from Terminal Control Mode” on page 150.
• For a network system with Ethernet connections see “Establishing a Telnet
Session for Ethernet Control Interface Products” on page 150 and “Network
Configuration from Terminal Control Mode” on page 150.

148 Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix B: Terminal Operation

Establishing a Terminal Operation Session for


Serial Control Interface Products
1. Configure a host machine (such as a PC with HyperTerminal1 installed) for
serial port communication at a baud rate of 9600 with these settings: Data
on the serial control port is encoded as 8N1:
• 8
• None
• 1
• No flow-control
2. Ensure that DIP switch SW3 is set as follows:
1 = OFF (down position)
2 = OFF (down position)
3 = OFF (down position)
4 = OFF (down position)
5 = OFF (down position)
6 = OFF (down position)
7 = OFF (down position)
8 = OFF (down position)
3. Connect a null modem serial cable from a PC serial port to the serial port on
the back of the Panacea frame..
4. Connect the X-Y to the router network.

Caution
Make sure the X-Y network is terminated appropriately.
5. Start up both PC and terminal emulation application.
6. Apply power to the Panacea frame.
7. At the host machine keyboard, enter the letter “Q.” The Command
Summary screen should appear on the PC screen. (See Figure C-1 on
page 154 for an example of the standard module command summary screen.
See Figure D-1 on page 163 for an example of the enhanced module
summary screen.)

1 HyperTerminal,
a product of Hilgraeve Inc., is a communications applet that ships with
Windows 95/98 and Windows NT 4.0.

Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual 149
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix B: Terminal Operation

Establishing a Telnet Session for Ethernet Control


Interface Products
Follow these steps to establish a Telnet session to the Panacea frame if the
Telnet application is resident on a PC:
1. Connect an Ethernet crossover cable between the 10Base-T connector on a
PC to the 10Base-T connector on the Panacea.
2. Change the IP address of your PC to a static IP address compatible with the
Panacea IP address.

Note
Invoking Telnet commands requires a valid username and
password. The default username is Leitch and the default
password is Leitchadmin. You should change these
defaults to ones that are more meaningful for your
organization.
3. At a DOS prompt, enter the word “telnet” and the IP address of the Panacea
frame (e.g., telnet 100.200.50.10).
4. Press <Enter>. The Telnet screen will appear.
5. Enter your login, then press <Enter>.
6. Enter your password, then press <Enter>.
7. The startup screen and the message “Type Q for menu...” will appear.
8. Type in the letter “Q” (it will not appear on the screen), and then press
<Enter>. The Command Summary screen will appear. (See page 163 for an
example of the Command Summary screen.)
Once a Telnet session is established, you will have access via the Telnet
interface to the commands listed in this section. Also see “Telnet Interface” on
page 152 for more information.

Network Configuration from Terminal Control Mode


The Panacea is ready to process user commands whenever you see the prompt
“>.” All user-entered commands should be followed by a carriage return. The
Panacea comes preconfigured with a network MAC address. However, you
must configure the IP, GATEWAY, and NETMASK parameters to have basic
network control of the Panacea.
The following are network configuration commands (commands are in bold).
Please use your proper network settings accordingly. The network parameters in
these examples are fictitious and should not be used. If you are not sure of the
proper network addresses to use, consult your Network System Administrator.
From the terminal program, issue these commands when a “>” (prompt) is seen
below the Command Summary window:
>SET IP1=192.168.127.33
>

150 Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix B: Terminal Operation

>SET GATEWAY1=192.168.127.1
>
>SET NETMASK1=255.255.255.128
>
>SAVE SYSCONFIG
Saving SysConfig.xml
Save complete.

>
You may review the network settings with the following terminal commands:
>show ipdisplay

Note
“Active” settings are the ones that the Panacea frame
currently uses. “Stored” settings are the ones that will be
used the next time the Panacea frame is started up. The
numbers will be different if the IP address is changed.
Active:
Ip Address: 192.168.127.33
Gateway Address: 192.168.127.1
Netmask Address: 255.255.255.128
Mac address 00-90-F9-00-22-F3
Stored:
Ip Address: 192.168.127.33
Gateway Address: 192.168.127.1
Netmask Address: 255.255.255.128
Mac address 00-90-F9-00-22-F3
>
This completes network configuration of the Panacea frame. For IP changes to
take effect, the Panacea frame should be restarted, type the reboot command at
the terminal prompt:
>REBOOT

Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual 151
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix B: Terminal Operation

Telnet Interface
Telnet Configuration
The Telnet interface allows remote connection to the router from a standard
Telnet client program (such as those provided with the Windows operating
system) over IP port 23. To log into the Telnet interface, a user account and
password is required (please refer to the Table D-7 on page 177 for appropriate
user management commands).
The Telnet commands listed in Table D-2 on page 166 provide control of the
Panacea Telnet interface (accessed by typing SHOW TELNET at the
command prompt).The commands appropriate to this configuration are
• SET TMAXCONNECTIONS
• SET TDISCONNECTUSER
• SHOW TCONNECTIONS
• SAVE SYSCONFIG

User Management
User accounts are required to be created for access to the router via the Web,
Telnet or FTP interfaces exposed by the router.
Appropriate user management commands are listed in Table D-7 on page 177.

Virtual (Network) X-Y Configuration


The virtual X-Y interface allows remote connection to a router from Harris
Ethernet-enabled router control hardware and software packages such as the
RCP-ABA-E, RouterWorks, Pilot 3.0 and Navigator 2.0. To connect to the
virtual X-Y interface, the router should be configured as a virtual X-Y server.
To enable the virtual X-Y server on the Panacea’s Ethernet port, use the
following commands:
>set ENET1 PROTOCOL2=ON
(Changes must be saved and the frame reset to take effect.)
>save sysconfig
Saving SysConfig.xml
Save complete.
>reboot
To configure operational parameters of the server, use the virtual X-Y
commands listed in Table D-2 on page 166 (accessed by typing SHOW
VIRTUALX-Y at the command prompt). The commands appropriate to this
configuration are
• SET VX-YMAXCONNECTIONS
• SET VX-YDISCONNECTUSER
• SHOW VX-YCONNECTIONS

152 Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix C
Terminal Operation Commands for a
Panacea Standard Module

This appendix lists terminal operation commands. It discusses the listed


commands in detail and outlines how the Panacea standard module (RES-L)
uses these commands.

Startup Operation
1. Set up a host machine as described in Appendix B.
2. At the host machine, type the letter “Q.” A command summary screen will
appear.

Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual 153
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix C: Terminal Operation Commands for a Panacea Standard Module

Command Summary Screen


Note
Some command descriptions refer to specific error message
numbers. For an explanation of these error message numbers,
please see Appendix F (page 189).
The Command Summary screen (Figure C-1) should be seen on the terminal
emulation application. The Command Summary screen provides the basic
command line entry syntax for the commands available for a Panacea router.

Figure C-1. Command Summary Screen

154 Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix C: Terminal Operation Commands for a Panacea Standard Module

List of Commands
The commands listed in Table C-1 are in order corresponding to their
appearance on the Command Summary screen. Each command is defined, its
syntax is illustrated, its parameters are listed, and its response is provided.

Table C-1. Startup Operation Commands: Panacea Standard Module


Command Syntax Input Parameters Result
AUTOTIME AUTOTIME None Starts the clean switch
or Autotime function if an
A optional clean switch
module is installed.
DESTINATION DESTINATION #[,#,...] #=Destination number Completes crosspoint
or operations after the level
D# number and the source
number have been set
INFORMATION INFORMATION None Provides information on the
or overall system as seen from
I the connection to the X-Y
bus
LEVEL LEVEL # #=Level number Sets the level number for a
or router that is connected to
L# an active system
POLL POLL # #=Source number to be Determines which
or searched; may be any destinations are connected
P# number 1 to 12 to a specific source number
QUERY QUERY None Provides a list that includes
or a basic command syntax
Q and brief description of each
command
READ Read None Lists all crosspoints within a
or frame in order by level
R numbers, then by
destination numbers that
show which source is
assigned to each of the
destinations on that level
Each crosspoint connection
is represented by a numeric
pair separated by a
semicolon and a space: the
first number is the
destination number; the
second number is the source
number that is connected to
that destination

Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual 155
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix C: Terminal Operation Commands for a Panacea Standard Module

Table C-1. Startup Operation Commands: Panacea Standard Module (Continued)


Command Syntax Input Parameters Result
SOURCE SOURCE # #=Source number.; can Sets the desired source
or range from 1 to the number
S# maximum number of
sources on that level, or “X”
for disconnect
SET MP SET MP #=# #=# = Module=Option Allows logical subpartitions
# = Module (#=1 through x, to be defined from a single
where x is the number of larger matrix.
hardware matrices available
in a frame)
#=Option (use SHOW MP
to see currently selected
option and which, if any,
options are available for that
routing module)
SET ALARMENABLE SET ALARMENABLE #,#=# #,# = Module,Alarm Sets or clears automatic
number alarm reporting over X-Y
# = Alarm enabling bus for alarm selected
0 = Disable An alarm that is not enabled
for automatic reporting can
1 = Enable still be read for its alarm
state; use SHOW ALARMS
to view alarm states
See Appendix E: “Device
Alarm List” for a list of
alarm numbers, their
meanings, and which
module types use them

156 Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix C: Terminal Operation Commands for a Panacea Standard Module

Table C-1. Startup Operation Commands: Panacea Standard Module (Continued)


Command Syntax Input Parameters Result
SET COMBINERMODE SET COMBINERMODE = [ON/ ON = Enables frame Frame combiner
OFF] combiner functionality functionality enabled or
OFF = Disables frame disabled
combiner functionality When ON, frame is
configured as a system
combiner; it switches
(combines) outputs of other
router frames to form a
larger router.
SET COMBINERMODE
SET COMBINERSIZE
SET FIRSTSOURCE
SHOW COMBINER
Destination locks and
protects will continue to
work normally; however,
crosspoint restrictions
cannot be stored by the
combiner frame for the
entire system, and are
therefore not allowed
Only one block size is
allowed for a combiner
system
SET COMBINERSIZE SET COMBINERSIZE = #,# #,# = Block size, Number of Sets block size and number
blocks of blocks for a frame
combiner
SET EQBYPASS SET EQBYPASS #,#=# #,# = Matrix,Input Sets or clears the input
# = 0...128 equalization function on
router modules that support
this option; use SHOW
INPUTS to view current
settings

Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual 157
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix C: Terminal Operation Commands for a Panacea Standard Module

Table C-1. Startup Operation Commands: Panacea Standard Module (Continued)


Command Syntax Input Parameters Result
SET FIRSTLEVEL SET FIRSTLEVEL =# # = Any number from 0 Sets the first Level of all
through 15 that corresponds router modules in a frame
Note to the first Level If a standard logic controller
is installed, any additional
Dual matrix routing
levels (either physical or
switchers with the partitioned) will be assigned
same format will consecutive increasing
be partitioned from number
larger Panacea To enable this command,
back panel you must set the pole 4 DIP
configurations switch on SW3 to ON
prior to shipment. This command is only
The two matrices available in Program mode
will be
automatically
assigned to levels
0 and 1.
SET FIRSTSOURCE SET FIRSTSOURCE =# # = A number that Sets the first Source of a
corresponds to the first frame (this command is
Source useful for making a large
system using a combiner
frame)
This command is only
available in Program mode
SET FIRSTDESTINATION SET FIRSTDESTINATION =# # = A number that Sets the first Destination for
corresponds to the first a frame
Destination This command allows you
to define a destination offset
for the frame., which is
useful in large systems to
keep multiple frames from
appearing to the control
system as “slaves”
SET PANELLEVELS SET PANELLEVELS =#[,#,...] # = Control and status levels Sets DIP switch mode levels
settings for a local control panel
(LCP) if installed
SET RECLOCKMODE SET RECLOCKMODE #,#=# #,#=# = Specifies (sets or clears) the
Module,output=[0...7] reclock operation of each
output of a router module
that support that option
Use SHOW
RECLOCKMODES for a
list of options
Use SHOW OUTPUTS to
view current settings

158 Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix C: Terminal Operation Commands for a Panacea Standard Module

Table C-1. Startup Operation Commands: Panacea Standard Module (Continued)


Command Syntax Input Parameters Result
SET SLEWRATE SET SLEWRATE #,#=# #,#=# = Sets or clears the output
Module,output=[1|0] slew rate of each output as
1 = Slow either slow or fast on router
modules that support that
0 = Fast option (slew rates are not
applicable to SD matrices or
to HD matrices with reclock
submodules)
Use SHOW OUTPUTS to
view current settings
SET TIMING SET TIMING # # = Matrix = [1|2] Sets the crosspoint Take
timing for a matrix
This command brings up a
page with three options:
Auto Mode, Standard
Mode, and Advanced Mode
Use Auto Mode for most
installations
Use Standard Mode if the
sync reference is different
than the video type being
switched (e.g., NTSC
SYNC, HDTV VIDEO)
Use Advanced Mode for
setting a switch point for
video standards not
otherwise supported.
SHOW ALARMS SHOW ALARMS None Displays alarm status
SHOW COMBINER SHOW COMBINER None Displays a frame’s
combiner option settings
SHOW ID SHOW ID None Displays controller and
interface serial numbers
SHOW INPUTS SHOW INPUTS None Shows input present and EQ
bypass settings if those
features are supported by
the device
SHOW MP SHOW MP # # = Number of the matrix Displays matrix partition
you want to see information
SHOW OFFSETS SHOW OFFSETS None Displays a frame’s
combiner option settings
SHOW OUTPUTS SHOW OUTPUTS None Displays output present,
lock status, and slew rate
setting if those features are
supported by the device

Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual 159
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix C: Terminal Operation Commands for a Panacea Standard Module

Table C-1. Startup Operation Commands: Panacea Standard Module (Continued)


Command Syntax Input Parameters Result
SHOW PANELLEVELS SHOW PANELLEVELS None Displays current DIP switch
mode levels for a local
control panel (this
information can be viewed
at any time, but it is only
used by the frame when it is
in DIP switch mode)
SHOW RECLOCKSETTINGS SHOW RECLOCKSETTINGS None Displays which, if any,
reclock settings are in use
SHOW RECLOCKMODES SHOW RECLOCKMODES None Displays which, if any,
reclock modes are
supported by the device
SHOW TIMING SHOW TIMING None Lists Crosspoint Take
timing; information that
appears depends on whether
SET TIMING for Auto,
Standard, or Advanced
mode was set
TERMINAL TERMINAL [ON|OFF] ON=Turns on Echo mode • When ECHO mode is
or OFF=Turns off Echo mode ON, all the characters
T[/F] sent are “echoed” to the
terminal
• When ECHO mode is
OFF, messages sent are
not “echoed” to the
terminal
XPOINT XPOINT [#L:] [#S] [ ,#D,#D, ... ] [#L:]=Level number The crosspoint is executed
or [#S]=Source number (you can use a READ
X [#L:] [#S] [ ,#D,#D, ... ] [,#D,#D,...]=Destination command to confirm the
number crosspoint connection)
This command combines
the operations of the
LEVEL, SOURCE, and
DESTINATION commands
into one command; and
allows multiple crosspoint
connection requests in one
command
ZERO ZERO None The device is restarted and
or status is cleared
Z

160 Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix D
Terminal Operation Commands for a
Panacea Enhanced Module

This appendix lists terminal operation commands used by the Panacea enhanced
module (RES-H). It discusses the listed commands in detail and outlines how
the Panacea enhanced module uses these commands.

Startup Operation
1. Set up a host machine as described in Appendix B.
2. At the host machine, type the letter “Q.” A command summary screen will
appear (see Figure D-1 on page 163).

Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual 161
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix D: Terminal Operation Commands for a Panacea Enhanced Module

System Setup
If you are setting up a brand new system, follow these steps:
1. Set up a name for your hardware file via the SET HWFILE command (see
page 171).
2. Set up a name for your matrix partitioning file via the SET MPFILE
command (see page 173).
3. Save the new file names to the sysconfig.xml file via the SAVE
SYSCONFIG command (see page 168).
4. Set the parameters you want to save to the hardware file and matrix
partitioning file.
5. Save your files via the SAVE HW command (see page 171) and the SAVE
MP command (see page 173).
If you are working with an existing system setup and do not want to change
the names of the hardware and matrix files, follow these steps:
1. Set the parameters you want to save to the hardware file and matrix
partitioning file.
2. Save your files via the SAVE HW command (see page 171) and the SAVE
MP command (see page 173).
If you are working with an existing system setup and want to change the
names of the hardware and matrix files, follow these steps:

Note
If you change a file name, a new file will be added to your system.
The original file will not be overwritten. If you want to use or re-use
another file, use the SET HWFILE (page 171) or the SET MPFILE
(page 173) commands.
1. Set the parameters you want to save to the hardware file.
2. Set up the new name for your hardware file via the SET HWFILE command
(see page 171).
3. Save your files via the SAVE HW command (see page 171).
4. Set the parameters you want to save to the matrix partitioning file.
5. Set up the new name for your matrix file via the SET MPFILE command
(see page 173).
6. Save your files via the SAVE MP command (see page 173).
7. Save the new file names to the sysconfig.xml file via the SAVE
SYSCONFIG command (see page 168).

162 Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix D: Terminal Operation Commands for a Panacea Enhanced Module

Command Summary Screen


The Command Summary screen (Figure D-1) should be seen on the terminal
emulation application. The Command Summary screen provides the basic
command line entry syntax for the commands available for a Panacea router.

Figure D-1. Command Summary Screen

Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual 163
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix D: Terminal Operation Commands for a Panacea Enhanced Module

List of Terminal Commands


The commands listed in Table D-1 on page 164 are in order corresponding to
their appearance on the Command Summary screen (Figure D-1 on page 163).
Each command is defined, its syntax is illustrated, its parameters are listed, and
its response is provided. More detailed explanations of these commands can be
found in the Serial Protocol Reference Manual.

Table D-1. Terminal Commands from Terminal Protocol Menu Screen


Command Syntax Input Parameters Result
DESTINATION DESTINATION #[,#,...] #=Destination number Completes crosspoint
or operations after the level
D# number and the source number
have been set
INFORMATION INFORMATION None Provides information on the
or overall system as seen from the
I connection to the X-Y bus
LEVEL LEVEL # #=Level number Sets the level number for a
or router that is connected to an
L# active system
POLL POLL # #=Source number to be Determines which destinations
or searched; may be any are connected to a specific
P# number 1 to 12 source number
QUERY QUERY None Provides a list that includes a
or basic command syntax and brief
Q description of each command
READ READ None Lists all crosspoints within a
or frame in order by level
R numbers, then by destination
numbers that show which
source is assigned to each of the
destinations on that level
Each crosspoint connection is
represented by a numeric pair
separated by a semicolon and a
space: the first number is the
destination number; the second
number is the source number
that is connected to that
destination
SOURCE SOURCE # # = Source number.; can Sets the desired source number
or range from 1 to the
S# maximum number of
sources on that level, or
“X” for disconnect

164 Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix D: Terminal Operation Commands for a Panacea Enhanced Module

Table D-1. Terminal Commands from Terminal Protocol Menu Screen (Continued)
Command Syntax Input Parameters Result
TERMINAL TERMINAL [ON|OFF] ON = Turns on Echo • When ECHO mode is ON,
or mode all the characters sent are
T[/F] OFF = Turns off Echo “echoed” to the terminal
mode • When ECHO mode is OFF,
messages sent are not
“echoed” to the terminal
XPOINT XPOINT [#L:] [#S] [ ,#D,#D, ... [#L:]= Level number The crosspoint is executed (you
(combines operations of the ] [#S] = Source number can use a READ command to
LEVEL, SOURCE, and or [,#D,#D,...] = confirm the crosspoint
DESTINATION commands X [#L:] [#S] [ ,#D,#D, ... ] Destination number connection)
into one command; and allows
multiple crosspoint connection
requests in one command)
ZERO ZERO None The device is restarted and
or status is cleared
Z
SHOW MENU SHOW MENU E E = Ethernet command Displays subcommands for
options Ethernet command options (see
page 166 for a list of
subcommands)
SHOW MENU F F = File system Displays subcommands for file
command options system command options (see
page 168 for a list of
subcommands)
SHOW MENU H H = Hardware options Displays subcommands for
command options hardware options (see page 169
for a list of subcommands)
SHOW MENU M M = matrix configuration Displays subcommands for the
command options matrix configuration command
options (see page 172 for a list
of subcommands)
SHOW MENU R R=Frame command Displays subcommands for
options frame command options (see
page 174 for a list of
subcommands)
SHOW MENU U U = User account Displays subcommands for user
command options account options command
options (see page 177 for a list
of subcommands)
REBOOT REBOOT None The device is restored, but the
status is not cleared

Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual 165
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix D: Terminal Operation Commands for a Panacea Enhanced Module

SHOW MENU [#] Subcommands


The SHOW MENU [#] command lists submenus of commands specific to that
particular parameter you enter. The SHOW MENU subcommands are listed
starting in Table D-2 through Table D-7 on page 177. Each command is defined,
its syntax is illustrated, its parameters are listed, and its response is provided.
Table D-2. Menu E (Ethernet) Subcommands
Command Syntax Input Parameters Result
SET IP SET IPx=#.#.#.# x = Ethernet port number Sets the router IP address for a
#.#.#.# = IP address network connector; this value is
(factory default setting is stored permanently once set and
192.168.100.250) does not have to be entered each
time at power-up
Reboot the router device for IP
related changes to take effect
SET GATEWAY SET GATEWAYx=#.#.#.# x = Ethernet port number Sets the network gateway IP
#.#.#.# = Gateway IP address; this value is stored
address (factory default permanently once set and does
setting is 192.168.100.1) not have to be entered each time
at power-up
Reboot the router device for IP
related changes to take effect
SET NETMASK SET NETMASKx=#.#.#.# x = Ethernet port number Assigns IP address to a subnet
#.#.#.# = System IP mask
address
SHOW IPDISPLAY SHOW IPDISPLAY None Device will display active and
stored network IP address,
subnet mask, and gateway
address
SET BOOTDEFAULTS SET BOOTDEFAULTS None Resets the IP address, subnet
mask, and network gateway
address to the factory defaults;
settings take effect after you
reboot the device
The SET BOOTDEFAULTS command will completely overwrite all system parameters and will
require you to reset all parameters in your system before it will operate. Improper use of this
command may result in permanent damage to your router. Do not use this command without first
contacting Customer Service. If you have inadvertently used this command, contact Customer
Service immediately.
SET PING SET PING #.#.#.#. #.#.#.#. = IP address of • If the device or computer is
another device or accessible, CLIENT #.#.#.#.
computer IS ALIVE message will
appear
• If the device or computer is
not accessible, HOST
UNREACHABLE message
will appear

166 Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix D: Terminal Operation Commands for a Panacea Enhanced Module

Table D-2. Menu E (Ethernet) Subcommands (Continued)


Command Syntax Input Parameters Result
SET APACHESTOP SET APACHESTOP None Device stops running the
Apache* Web server
* “Apache” is a licensed trademark of the
Apache Software Foundation, Forest Hill,
Maryland, USA.

SHOW TELNET SHOW TELNET None Displays these Telnet options


available on your device:
• SET TMAXCONNECTIONS
• SET TDISCONNECTUSER
• SHOW TCONNECTIONS
SET TMAXCONNECTIONS SET TMAXCONNECTIONS=# # = Number of allowable Restricts the maximum number
concurrent Telnet of concurrent Telnet sessions to
sessions a specific number (the
maximum number of sessions
cannot exceed 12)
When you use this command the system will change the number of sessions allowed but it will not save change permanently .
Use the SAVE SYSCONFIG command to commit the change to system memory or use the REBOOT command to continue with
the previous configuration.
SET TDISCONNECTUSER SET TDISCONNECTUSER=# # = Session number Terminates the Telnet
connection to your device
(SHOW TCONNECTIONS
command will display the
number of sessions)
SHOW TCONNECTIONS SHOW TCONNECTIONS None Displays Telnet system
information (i.e., who is
connected and the number of
total connections)
SHOW VIRTUALXY SHOW VIRTUALXY None Displays these virtual (network)
X-Y options available on your
device:
• SET VXYMAXCONNECTIONS
• SET VXYDISCONNECTUSER
• SHOW VXYCONNECTIONS
SET VXYMAXCONNECTIONS SET VXYMAXCONNECTIONS=# # = Number of allowable Restricts the maximum number
concurrent virtual X-Y of concurrent virtual X-Y
sessions sessions to a specific number
(the maximum number of
sessions cannot exceed 12)
When setting this value, note that one connection is always required by the system, so this value should be set to one number
greater than your desired maximum number of client connections; for example, if you need two simultaneous client connections,
=# should be set to 3 to allow for the required “system” connection.
When you use this command the system will change the number of sessions allowed but it will not save change permanently .
Use the SAVE SYSCONFIG command to commit the change to system memory or use the REBOOT command to continue with
the previous configuration.

Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual 167
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix D: Terminal Operation Commands for a Panacea Enhanced Module

Table D-2. Menu E (Ethernet) Subcommands (Continued)


Command Syntax Input Parameters Result
SET VXYDISCONNECTUSER SET VXYDISCONNECTUSER=# # = Session number Terminates a virtual X-Y
connection to your device
(SHOW VXYCONNECTIONS
will display the number of
sessions)
SHOW VXYCONNECTIONS SHOW VXYCONNECTIONS None Displays virtual X-Y system
information (i.e., who is
connected and the number of
total connections)
SAVE SYSCONFIG SAVE SYSCONFIG None Saves device’s operating
system parameters

Table D-3. Menu F (File System) Subcommands


Command Syntax Input Parameters Result
SET FILEDEL SET FILEDEL=Name Name = Name of file to Specified file deleted; the
be deleted message FILE (file name)
DELETED will appear on the
response screen
GET BOOTFILE GET BOOTFILE=Name Name = Name of the Displays name of the boot file
boot file that was loaded when the device
booted up
SET BOOTFILE SET BOOTFILE=Name Name = Name of the System will change the name of
boot file the boot file, but will not
display the new name unless
you enter the GET BOOTFILE
command
SHOW FS SHOW FS None Displays all pertinent file
system information
SHOW FILES SHOW FILES None Displays a list of associated
files

168 Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix D: Terminal Operation Commands for a Panacea Enhanced Module

Table D-4. Menu H (Hardware Options) Subcommands


Command Syntax Input Parameters Result
SHOW ALARMS SHOW ALARMS None Displays alarm status
SET ALARMENABLE SET ALARMENABLE #,#=# #,#=# = Module,alarm Sets or clears the automatic
number alarm reporting over the X-Y
• 0 (Disable) bus for the alarm selected
See Appendix E: “Device
• 1 (Enable) Alarm List” for a list of alarm
numbers, their meanings, and
which module types use them
SET AUTOTIME SET AUTOTOME # # = Matrix Starts the clean switch
Autotime function if an optional
clean switch module is
installed.
SHOW INPUTS SHOW INPUTS None Displays the number of inputs
for each matrix, and tells
whether or not input signal
presence detection is available
for a particular matrix
SHOW RECLOCKMODES SHOW RECLOCKMODES None Displays which, if any, reclock
modes are supported by the
device.
SHOW RECLOCKSTATUS SHOW RECLOCKSTATUS None Displays current reclock status
for all matrices on the display
screen
GET RECLOCKMODE GET RECLOCKMODE #,# #,# = Matrix,output [0 Displays current reclock mode,
through 128] sorted by output, on the display
screen
SET RECLOCKMODE SET RECLOCKMODE #,# #,# = Matrix,output [0 Allows you to specify the
through 128] reclock operation of each output
of a router module that support
that option. See SHOW
RECLOCKMODES for a list of
options; use the GET
RECLOCKMODE command to
view the current settings
When you enter this command, the system will set or clear the reclock mode, but it will not save the change permanently until
you enter the SAVE HW command. Use the SAVE HW command to commit the change to system memory, or use the REBOOT
command to continue with the previous configuration.

Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual 169
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix D: Terminal Operation Commands for a Panacea Enhanced Module

Table D-4. Menu H (Hardware Options) Subcommands (Continued)


Command Syntax Input Parameters Result
SET EQBYPASS SET EQBYPASS #,# #,# = Matrix,output [0 Allows you to bypass (disable)
through 128] the input equalization function
on router modules that support
this option.
Use the SHOW EQBYPASS
command to view current
settings
When you enter this command, the system will set or clear the EQ bypass mode setting, but it will not save the change
permanently until you enter the SAVE HW command. Use the SAVE HW command to commit the change to system memory, or
use the REBOOT command to continue with the previous configuration.
SHOW EQBYPASS SHOW EQBYPASS None Displays EQ bypass settings on
the display screen
SET SLEWRATE SET SLEWRATE #,#=# Module,output=[1|0] Sets the slew rate of each output
1 = Slow as either slow or fast on router
0 = Fast modules that support this option
(slew rates are not applicable to
SD matrices or to HD matrices
with reclock submodules)
Use the SHOW SLEWRATE
command to view current
settings
* When you enter this command, the system will set the output slew rate, but it will not save the change permanently until you
enter the SAVE HW command. Use the SAVE HW command to commit the change to system memory, or use the REBOOT
command to continue with the previous configuration.
SHOW SLEWRATE SHOW SLEWRATE None Shows the slew rate of each
output as either slow or fast on
router modules that support this
option. Slew rates are not
applicable to SD matrices or to
HD matrices with reclock
submodules. For matrices with
a slew rate of slow, the output
display will report ON; for
matrices with a slew rate of fast,
the output display will report
OFF; for standard definition
matrices or high definition
matrices with a reclock
submodule, the message
“Matrix [X] does not support
the Slew Rate option” will
appear.

170 Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix D: Terminal Operation Commands for a Panacea Enhanced Module

Table D-4. Menu H (Hardware Options) Subcommands (Continued)


Command Syntax Input Parameters Result
SET TIMING SET TIMING # # = Matrix [1|2] Displays a page with three
options: Auto Mode, Standard
Mode, and Advanced Mode.
Use Auto Mode for most
installations; use Standard
Mode if the sync reference is
different than the video type
being switched (e.g., NTSC
SYNC, HDTV VIDEO); use
Advanced Mode for setting a
switch point for video standards
not otherwise supported
When you enter this command, the system will set the matrix Crosspoint Take timing, but it will not save the change permanently
until you enter the SAVE HW command. Use the SAVE HW command to commit the change to system memory, or use the
REBOOT command to continue with the previous configuration.
SHOW TIMING SHOW TIMING None Displays information that
depends on whether the SET
TIMING command for Auto,
Standard, or Advanced mode
was set.
SAVE HW SAVE HW None Saves the current hardware
configuration to file (hw.xml is
the default file name; this can
be changed via the SET
HWFILE command)
SET HWFILE SET HWFILE=Filename Filename = Any name Sets the file name for the XML
you designate as the file used to store hardware
hardware configuration parameters
file name
GET HWFILE GET HWFILE None Displays the file name of the
current XML file used to store
hardware parameters
SAVE SYSCONFIG SAVE SYSCONFIG None Saves device’s operating
system parameters
This command saves a device’s operating system parameters, including configuration file names, to the sysconfig.xml file. Saved
system parameters are used during the re-initialization of your device to allow you to reuse custom configurations.

Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual 171
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix D: Terminal Operation Commands for a Panacea Enhanced Module

Table D-5. Menu M (Matrix) Subcommands


Command Syntax Input Parameters Result
SHOW MP SHOW MP # # = The number of the The SHOW MP response
matrix you want to see screen will display this
information for the requested
matrix: program mode, matrix
types, new inputs, stuffed
inputs, available partitions,
current partition, components,
sources, destinations, levels,
starting source, and starting
destination
SET MP SET MP #=# 1st # = Module 1 through Allows logical subpartitions to
x, where x is the number be defined from a single larger
of hardware matrices matrix; use the SHOW MP
available in a frame command to see the currently
2nd # = Option selected option and which (if
any) options are available for
that routing module
When you enter this command, the system will change the matrix partitioning style, but it will not save the change permanently
until you enter the SAVE MP command. Use the SAVE MP command to commit the change to system memory, or use the
REBOOT command to continue with the previous configuration.
SET MPARM SET MPARM # = The number of the Allows each individual
or matrix you want to set component within a matrix to
SET MPARM # be configured; properties that
Note can be configured are Level
assignment, starting Source,
and starting Destination (this
command can only be used in
the simple partitioning mode
component of Program mode)
When you enter this command, the system will change the matrix parameters, but it will not save the change permanently until
you enter the SAVE MP command. Use the SAVE MP command to commit the change to system memory, or use the REBOOT
command to continue with the previous configuration
SHOW COMBINER SHOW COMBINER None Displays a frame’s combiner
option settings

Four terminal commands are used to configure a combiner system:


SET COMBINERMODE
SET COMBINERSIZE
SET FIRSTSOURCE
SHOW COMBINER
Destination locks and protects will continue to work normally. However, crosspoint restrictions
cannot be stored by the combiner frame for the entire system, and are therefore not allowed.
(Note that only one block size is allowed for a combiner system.)

172 Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix D: Terminal Operation Commands for a Panacea Enhanced Module

Table D-5. Menu M (Matrix) Subcommands (Continued)


Command Syntax Input Parameters Result
SET COMBINERMODE SET COMBINERMODE= ON = Enables frame When ON, the frame is
[ON|OFF] combiner functionality configured as a system
OFF = Disables frame combiner. It switches
combiner functionality (combines) the outputs of other
router frames to form a larger
router
SET COMBINERSIZE SET COMBINERSIZE=#,# #,# = Block size, number
of blocks
SAVE MP SAVE MP None Saves the current matrix
partitioning information to the
matrix partitioning file
configured in sysconfig.xml.
SET MPFILE SET MPFILE=FileName FILENAME = Name for Sets the name for the file used
the matrix partitioning to store matrix partitioning
XML file information.
When you enter this command:
• The system will change the name of the XML file, but will not save the change permanently until you enter the SAVE MP
command. Use the SAVE MP command to commit the change to system memory, or use the REBOOT command to continue
with the previous configuration.
• The system will change the name of the matrix partitioning file, but will not display the new name. Use the GET MPFILE
command to view the current settings.
GET MPFILE GET MPFILE None Displays the file name stored in
sysconfig.xml that is used to
save matrix partitioning
information
SAVE SYSCONFIG SAVE SYSCONFIG None Saves device’s operating
system parameters

Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual 173
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix D: Terminal Operation Commands for a Panacea Enhanced Module

Table D-6. Menu R (Frame) Subcommands


Command Syntax Input Parameters Result
SHOW RPARM SHOW RPARM None Displays the basic router
parameters, as well as software
and firmware versions
SHOW OFFSETS SHOW OFFSETS None Displays a frame’s combiner
option settings. (For the
enhanced module, these values
are used in DIP switch mode
only. However, they serve as a
starting point when changing
component properties in
Program mode.)
mode, the FIRSTLEVEL value serves as the starting Level of the first matrix
In DIP switch
component. Every following individual independent matrix component will have its Level
assignment numbered sequentially based on this FIRSTLEVEL starting value. All Source and
Destination offsets will remain the same throughout the matrix.
In Program mode, you can set the FIRSTLEVEL, FIRSTSOURCE, and FIRSTDESTINATION
assignments individually for every component. However, the system will use the FIRSTLEVEL,
FIRSTSOURCE, and FIRSTDESTINATION values as the starting values.
SET FIRSTLEVEL See page 178 for more information
SET FIRSTSOURCE See page 180 for more information
SET FIRSTDESTINATION See page 181 for more information
SHOW PANELLEVELS SHOW PANELLEVELS None Displays the current DIP switch
mode levels for a local control
panel. (This information can be
viewed at any time, but it is
only used by the frame when it
is in DIP switch mode.)
SAVE MP SAVE MP None Saves the current matrix
partitioning information to the
matrix partitioning file
configured in sysconfig.xml.
SET MPFILE SET MPFILE=FileName FILENAME = Name for Sets the name for the file used
the matrix partitioning to store matrix partitioning
XML file information.
When you enter this command:
• The system will change the name of the XML file, but will not save the change permanently until you enter the SAVE MP
command. Use the SAVE MP command to commit the change to system memory, or use the REBOOT command to continue
with the previous configuration.
• The system will change the name of the matrix partitioning file, but will not display the new name. Use the GET MPFILE
command to view the current settings.

174 Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix D: Terminal Operation Commands for a Panacea Enhanced Module

Table D-6. Menu R (Frame) Subcommands (Continued)


Command Syntax Input Parameters Result
GET MPFILE GET MPFILE None Displays the file name stored in
sysconfig.xml that is used to
save matrix partitioning
information
SAVE SYSCONFIG SAVE SYSCONFIG None Saves device’s operating
system parameters, including
configuration file names, to
sysconfig.xml file; saved
system parameters are used
during the re-initialization of
your device to allow you to
reuse custom configurations
GET TIME GET TIME None Displays the system date and
time
SET TIME SET TIME = AA = Year System date and time
AABBCCDDEEFF BB = Month information will be changed to
CC = Day correspond to the input
DD = Hour parameters
EE = Minute
FF = Second
SHOW TIMESERVER SHOW TIMESERVER None Displays the time server IP
address and the timeout length
as set via the SET
TIMESERVER command
SET TIMESERVER SET TIMESERVER=#,# #,# = IP address,timeout Sets the time server IP and
length timeout in milliseconds
SET TIMEZONE SET TIMEZONE=# # = Time zone offset in Sets the time zone offset (in
minutes minutes) from Coordinated
Universal Time (UTC)

Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual 175
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix D: Terminal Operation Commands for a Panacea Enhanced Module

Table D-6. Menu R (Frame) Subcommands (Continued)


Command Syntax Input Parameters Result
SET SYNCTIME SET SYNCTIME None Causes the device to update its
time to synchronize with the
time server’s time
SET RMODE SET RMODE None Provides current partitioning
(simple or advanced) mode
setting. System prompts you
enter the frame mode number
for the frame you want to reset.
After you enter the frame mode
number, the system
automatically performs a SAVE
SYSCONFIG command, then
asks you if you want to reboot
the system If you reboot the
system, the new setting will
take effect when the frame is
re-initialized; otherwise, the
frame will stay in its current
configuration.
If you set the RMODE to Simple Partitioning Mode, you will be able to change, update, and save
files via terminal commands. (You will be able to use a terminal to set the RMODE to either
Simple Partitioning Mode or Advanced Partitioning Mode.) If you set the RMODE to Advanced
Partitioning Mode, you will be able to change, update, and save files via RouterMapper. While in
this mode you will not be able to set router parameters via terminal commands. (You will not be
able to use RouterMapper to set the RMODE back to Simple Partitioning Mode.)

176 Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix D: Terminal Operation Commands for a Panacea Enhanced Module

Table D-7. Menu U (User Account) Subcommands


Command Syntax Input Parameters Result
SHOW USERS SHOW USERS None Shows a list of authorized users,
associated groups, and login
status via the User Account
Summary Table
SAVE USER SAVE USER=abc,#,abc abc = Name of user who • System will ask for ADMIN
will be added to Panacea password
compact flash module • System will ask for new
database password for specified user
# = Group to which the
• System will ask for
specified user will be
password confirmation
added
abc = Password for the • User is added to flash
specified user module database
SET DELETEUSER SET DELETEUSER=abc abc = Name of user who • System will ask for ADMIN
will be deleted from password
Panacea compact flash • System will ask for
module database verification that the user
should be deleted
• User is deleted from flash
module database
SET PASSWORD SET PASSWORD =abc,abc abc = Name of user who • System will ask for ADMIN
needs password to access password
Panacea functions • System will ask for existing
changed to a new password for specified user
password
• System will ask for new
abc = Password for
password for specified user
specified user
• System will ask for new
password confirmation
• Specified password for user
is changed on flash module
database
SET USERGROUP SET USERGROUP abc = Name of user who • System will ask for ADMIN
USER=abc,# will be assigned to a password
specific group • User is added to a specific
# = Group number group
User group is required, but not
used by Panacea

Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual 177
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix D: Terminal Operation Commands for a Panacea Enhanced Module

SET FIRSTLEVEL
Definition This command allows you to set the first Level of a frame. You can set the first
Level manually via DIP switch settings; for Simple Partitioning mode via
HyperTerminal commands; or for Advanced Partitioning mode via the
RouterMapper configuration utility software.
Setting First Level via DIP Switch, Simple Partitioning, or Advanced Partitioning Mode

Note
Dual matrix routing switchers with the same format will be
partitioned from larger Panacea back panel configurations prior to
shipment. The two matrices will be automatically assigned to
levels 0 and 1.
Setting First Level via DIP Switch Mode
In DIP switch mode, the FIRSTLEVEL value serves as the starting Level of
the first matrix component. Every following individual independent matrix
component will have its Level assignment numbered sequentially based on this
FIRSTLEVEL starting value. All Source and Destination offsets will remain
the same throughout the matrix.
These setup values will apply to alarm reporting and matrix partitioning.
1. Set pole 1 of DIP switch SW1 to DIP switch mode (see Figure 3-4 on
page 66).
2. Set poles 1-3 of DIP switch SW2 to the desired first Level (see Figure 3-5
on page 67).
3. Set poles 4-8 of DIP switch SW2 to the desired first Destination (see
Figure 3-5 on page 67).
4. Via a HyperTerminal session:
a. Set up the desired first Source (see “SET FIRSTSOURCE Command
Information” on page 181 for command syntax).
b. Enter the SAVE MP command to commit the change to system
memory (see “SAVE MP” on page 174 for command syntax).
Setting First Level via Simple Partitioning Mode
In Simple Partitioning mode, you can set the Level, Source, and Destination
assignments individually for every component. However, the system will use
the FIRSTLEVEL, FIRSTSOURCE, and FIRSTDESTINATION values as
the starting values.
These setup values will apply to alarm reporting and the initial properties only
for a designated component of your routing matrix.
1. Set pole 1 of DIP switch SW1 to Program mode (see Figure 3-4 on
page 66).
2. Via a HyperTerminal session:
a. Set the router partitioning mode to Simple Partitioning Mode (see “SET
RMODE” on page 176 for command syntax).

178 Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix D: Terminal Operation Commands for a Panacea Enhanced Module

b. Set up the desired first Level (see “SET FIRSTLEVEL Command


Information” on page 179 below for command syntax).
c. Set up the desired first Destination (see “SET FIRSTDESTINATION
Command Information” on page 183 for command syntax).
d. Set up the desired first Source (see “SET FIRSTSOURCE Command
Information” on page 181 for command syntax).
e. Enter the SET MPARM command to set independent component
properties (see “SET MPARM” on page 172 for command syntax).
f. Enter the SAVE MP command to commit the change to system
memory (see “SAVE MP” on page 174 for command syntax). When
you enter the SET FIRSTLEVEL command, the system will change
the first Level, but it will not save the change permanently until you
enter the SAVE MP command.
Setting First Level via Advanced Partitioning Mode
First Level, first Destination, and first Source set through RouterMapper apply
to alarm updating only, RouterMapper will allow you to individually configure
each component within a matrix.
1. Set pole 1 of DIP switch SW1 to Program mode (see Figure 3-4 on
page 66).
2. Via a PC with RouterMapper installed, set up your frame to the desired
configuration (see “Adding Panacea Frames” in the RouterMapper
Configuration Utility Reference Guide for instructions).
RouterMapper will automatically set the frame to Advanced Partitioning mode.
If you need to reset the frame to simple partitioning mode:
1. Exit RouterMapper.
2. Via a HyperTerminal session, set the router partitioning mode to Simple
Partitioning Mode (see “SET RMODE” on page 176 for command syntax).
SET FIRSTLEVEL Command Information

Syntax SET FIRSTLEVEL =#

Command SET FIRSTLEVEL Set a frame’s first Level command


=# A number that corresponds to the first Level
Parameters
(can be any number from 0 through 15)

Response This command sets the first level of all router modules in a frame. If a standard
logic controller is installed, any additional levels (either physical or partitioned)
will be assigned consecutive increasing numbers.

Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual 179
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix D: Terminal Operation Commands for a Panacea Enhanced Module

SET FIRSTSOURCE
Definition This command allows you to set the first Source of a frame. You can set the first
Source “manually” (that is, via HyperTerminal commands after setting First
Level and First Destination via DIP switches); for Simple Partitioning mode via
HyperTerminal commands; or for Advanced Partitioning mode via the
RouterMapper configuration utility software.
Setting First Source via DIP Switch, Simple Partitioning, or Advanced Partitioning Mode

Setting First Source via DIP Switch Mode


In DIP switch mode, the FIRSTSOURCE value serves as the starting Source of
the first matrix component. Every following individual independent matrix
component will have its Source assignment numbered sequentially based on this
FIRSTSOURCE starting value. All Levels and Destination offsets will remain
the same throughout the matrix.
These setup values will apply to alarm reporting and matrix partitioning.
1. Set pole 1 of DIP switch SW1 to DIP switch mode (see Figure 3-4 on
page 66).
2. Set poles 1-3 of DIP switch SW2 to the desired first Level (see Figure 3-5
on page 67).
3. Set poles 4-8 of DIP switch SW2 to the desired first Destination (see
Figure 3-5 on page 67).
4. Via a HyperTerminal session:
a. Set up the desired first Source (see SET FIRSTSOURCE Command
Information below for command syntax).
b. Enter the SAVE MP command to commit the change to system
memory (see “SAVE MP” on page 174 for command syntax).
Setting First Source via Simple Partitioning Mode
In Simple Partitioning mode, you can set the Level, Source, and Destination
assignments individually for every component. However, the system will use
the FIRSTLEVEL, FIRSTSOURCE, and FIRSTDESTINATION values as
the starting values.
These setup values will apply to alarm reporting and the initial properties only
for a designated component of your routing matrix.
1. Set pole 1 of DIP switch SW1 to Program mode (see Figure 3-4 on
page 66).
2. Via a HyperTerminal session:
a. Set the router partitioning mode to Simple Partitioning mode (see “SET
RMODE” on page 176 for command syntax).
b. Set up the desired first Level (see “SET FIRSTLEVEL Command
Information” on page 179 for command syntax).
c. Set up the desired first Destination (see “SET FIRSTDESTINATION
Command Information” on page 183 for command syntax).

180 Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix D: Terminal Operation Commands for a Panacea Enhanced Module

d. Set up the desired first Source (see SET FIRSTSOURCE Command


Information below for command syntax).
e. Enter the SET MPARM command to set independent component
properties (see “SET MPARM” on page 172 for command syntax).
f. Enter the SAVE MP command to commit the change to system
memory (see “SAVE MP” on page 174 for command syntax). When
you enter the SET FIRSTSOURCE command, the system will change
the first Source, but it will not save the change permanently until you
enter the SAVE MP command.
Setting First Source via Advanced Partitioning Mode
First Level, first Destination, and first Source set through RouterMapper apply
to alarm updating only, RouterMapper will allow you to individually configure
each component within a matrix.
1. Set pole 1 of DIP switch SW1 to Program mode (see Figure 3-4 on
page 66).
2. Via a PC with RouterMapper installed, set up your frame to the desired
configuration (see “Adding Panacea Frames” in the RouterMapper
Configuration Utility Reference Guide for instructions).
RouterMapper will automatically set the frame to Advanced Partitioning mode.
If you need to reset the frame to simple partitioning mode:
1. Exit RouterMapper.
2. Via a HyperTerminal session, set the router partitioning mode to Simple
Partitioning mode (see “SET RMODE” on page 176 for command syntax).
SET FIRSTSOURCE Command Information

Syntax SET FIRSTSOURCE =#

Command SET FIRSTSOURCE Set a frame’s first Source command


=# A number that corresponds to the first
Parameters
Source

Response This command is useful for making a large system that uses a combiner frame.

SET FIRSTDESTINATION
Definition This command allows you to set the first Destination of a frame. You can set the
first Destination manually via DIP switch settings; for Simple Partitioning mode
via HyperTerminal commands; or for Advanced Partitioning mode via the
RouterMapper configuration utility software.

Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual 181
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix D: Terminal Operation Commands for a Panacea Enhanced Module

Setting First Destination via DIP Switch, Simple Partitioning, or Advanced Partitioning Mode

Setting First Destination via DIP Switch Mode


In DIP switch mode, the FIRSTDESTINATION value serves as the starting
Destination of the first matrix component. Every following individual
independent matrix component will have its Destination assignment numbered
sequentially based on this FIRSTDESTINATION starting value. All Levels
and Source offsets will remain the same throughout the matrix.
These setup values will apply to alarm reporting and matrix partitioning.
1. Set pole 1 of DIP switch SW1 to DIP switch mode (see Figure 3-4 on
page 66).
2. Set poles 1-3 of DIP switch SW2 to the desired first Level (see Figure 3-5
on page 67).
3. Set poles 4-8 of DIP switch SW2 to the desired first Destination (see
Figure 3-5 on page 67).
4. Via a HyperTerminal session:
a. Set up the desired first Source (see “SET FIRSTSOURCE Command
Information” on page 181 for command syntax).
b. Enter the SAVE MP command to commit the change to system
memory (see “SAVE MP” on page 174 for command syntax).
Setting First Destination via Simple Partitioning Mode
In Simple Partitioning mode, you can set the Level, Source, and Destination
assignments individually for every component. However, the system will use
the FIRSTLEVEL, FIRSTSOURCE, and FIRSTDESTINATION values as
the starting values.
These setup values will apply to alarm reporting and the initial properties only
for a designated component of your routing matrix.
1. Set pole 1 of DIP switch SW1 to Program mode (see Figure 3-4 on
page 66).
2. Via a HyperTerminal session:
a. Set the router partitioning mode to Simple Partitioning mode (see “SET
RMODE” on page 176 for command syntax).
b. Set up the desired first Level (see “SET FIRSTLEVEL Command
Information” on page 179 for command syntax).
c. Set up the desired first Destination (see SET FIRSTDESTINATION
Command Information below for command syntax).
d. Set up the desired first Source (see “SET FIRSTLEVEL Command
Information” on page 179 for command syntax).
e. Enter the SET MPARM command to set independent component
properties (see “SET MPARM” on page 172 for command syntax).

182 Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix D: Terminal Operation Commands for a Panacea Enhanced Module

f. Enter the SAVE MP command to commit the change to system


memory (see “SAVE MP” on page 174 for command syntax). When
you enter the SET FIRSDESTINATION command, the system will
change the first Destination, but it will not save the change permanently
until you enter the SAVE MP command.
Setting First Destination via Advanced Partitioning Mode
First Level, first Destination, and first Source set through RouterMapper apply
to alarm updating only, RouterMapper will allow you to individually configure
each component within a matrix.
1. Set pole 1 of DIP switch SW1 to Program mode (see Figure 3-4 on
page 66).
2. Via a PC with RouterMapper installed, set up your frame to the desired
configuration (see “Adding Panacea Frames” in the RouterMapper
Configuration Utility Reference Guide for instructions).
RouterMapper will automatically set the frame to Advanced Partitioning mode.
If you need to reset the frame to simple partitioning mode:
1. Exit RouterMapper.
2. Via a HyperTerminal session, set the router partitioning mode to Simple
Partitioning mode (see “SET RMODE” on page 176 for command syntax).
SET FIRSTDESTINATION Command Information

Syntax SET FIRSTDESTINATION =#

SET FIRSTDESTINATION Set a frame’s first Destination


Command
command
=# A number that corresponds to the
Parameters
first Destination

Response This command allows you to define a destination offset for the frame. This is
useful in large systems to keep multiple frames from appearing to the control
system as “slaves.”

Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual 183
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix D: Terminal Operation Commands for a Panacea Enhanced Module

184 Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix E
Device Alarm List

Overview
Both Panacea standard and enhanced resource modules use the SET
ALARMENABLE command. This command requires you to insert the
appropriate alarm number for automatic reporting. Table E-1 on page 186
provides a list of alarm numbers with their corresponding descriptions, as well
as an indicator as to which modules use these alarm numbers. (Analog video,
HD/SDI, and SDI modules do not have alarm numbers associated with them.)

Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual 185
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix E: Device Alarm List

Device Alarm List


Table E-1. Device Alarm Numbers and Descriptions

Alarm Description (by Module Type)


No. Analog Audio Clean/Quiet Switch AES Audio
1 Power supply alarm - no +5V — AES reference not locked
2 Power supply alarm - no +17V — —
3 Power supply alarm - no +12V — —
4 Power supply alarm - no -17V — —
5 Power supply alarm - no -12V — —
6 Power supply alarm - no -5V — —
7 Channel A audio overload > 28.2dBu — —
8 Channel B audio overload > 28.2dBu — —
9 Channel A has no audio — —
10 Channel B has no audio — —
11 — 24 Reserved for future use Reserved for future use Reserved for future use
25 — Input 1 has timing error —
26 — Input 2 has timing error —
27 — Input 3 has timing error —
28 — Input 4 has timing error —
29 — Input 5 has timing error —
30 — Input 6 has timing error —
31 — Input 7 has timing error —
32 — Input 8 has timing error —
33 — Input 9 has timing error —
34 — Input 10 has timing error —
35 — Input 11 has timing error —
36 — Input 12 has timing error —
37 — Input 13 has timing error —
38 — Input 14 has timing error —
39 — Input 15 has timing error —
40 — Input 16 has timing error —
41 — Input 17 has timing error —
42 — Input 18 has timing error —
43 — Input 19 has timing error —
44 — Input 20 has timing error —

186 Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix E: Device Alarm List

Table E-1. Device Alarm Numbers and Descriptions (Continued)

Alarm Description (by Module Type)


No. Analog Audio Clean/Quiet Switch AES Audio
45 — Input 21 has timing error —
46 — Input 22 has timing error —
47 — Input 23 has timing error —
48 — Input 24 has timing error —
49 — Input 25 has timing error —
50 — Input 26 has timing error —
51 — Input 27 has timing error —
52 — Input 28 has timing error —
53 — Input 29 has timing error —
54 — Input 30 has timing error —
55 — Input 31 has timing error —
56 — Input 32 has timing error —
57 — Monitor all input timing alarms —
58 — Monitor all alarms —
59 — 254 Reserved for future use Reserved for future use Reserved for future use
255 — Power supply 1 failed —
256 — Power supply 2 failed —

Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual 187
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix E: Device Alarm List

188 Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix F
Error Messages and Hexadecimal
Numbers

X-Y Error Messages


X-Y error messages are generated from the router when there has been an X-Y
bus error, a system fault error or command line entry error. Some command
entry errors may not be identified as an error by the router or routing system if
they are made in conjunction with other commands that are operational and
accurate. The following errors are divided by class and are accompanied by
detailed descriptions of the error.
Error messages are summarized in Table F-1 on page 190. Table F-1 is a list of
messages generated by all Harris routers. Not all message types are generated
by every frame, but all message types are listed here for completeness.

Class 1 Errors
Class 1 errors are X-Y communications bus errors that have nothing to do with
the communications through the serial port. Please check the X-Y bus for
problems here.

Class 2 Errors
Class 2 errors are command line entry errors that occur when a mistake is made
on the command line.

Class 3 Errors
Class 3 errors are system fault errors.

Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual 189
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix F: Error Messages and Hexadecimal Numbers

Table F-1. Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 Error Messages


Error No. Definition Explanation
CLASS 1 ERRORS
1001 Fatal X-Y bus collision detected during A fatal error caused by a failure in the X-Y
transmission. Press the ESC key to reset. communications bus. The router will automatically
reset within approximately five seconds. The router
can be reset faster by sending the ESC character to
the serial port or by pressing the Panel Enable
button on the local control panel.
CLASS 2 ERRORS
2001 Illegal character or error detected on character A transmission error from the controlling device
receipt. Command Line aborted. has been noted (e.g., a framing error), an illegal
character has been sent (e.g., an illegal control
character), or more than 254 characters have been
entered. This error will abort any command line
entered since the last prompt (the same effect as if
an ESCAPE were entered on the command line).
2002 Illegal, invalid, or overrange parameter entered. An illegal parameter has been entered and the
Command entry ignored. offending command has been ignored. If there are
commands on the command line following the
command causing the error, they may not perform
as expected (e.g., a LEVEL command with an
overrange value will not change the level number).
2003 Current source value out of range for the requested The currently set source number is greater than the
Level. Invalid crosspoint request(s) ignored. number of sources in the currently set level and a
crosspoint connection was attempted. Only the
illegal crosspoints are ignore while legal requests
on the command line will be set.
2004 Level requested does not exist. The level number requested is valid (0...255) but
Command entry ignored. the level does not exist in the current system.
Subsequent commands in the command line may
not perform as expected as the currently set level
number remains unchanged.
2005 Invalid command entered in Command Line. The first letter of the command key word is not
Command entry ignored. valid for this revision. The offending command is
skipped.
2007 Error in entering destination number(s). Invalid An invalid parameter was entered in a
crosspoint request(s) ignored. DESTINATION or CLEAR command. Only
those requests with invalid destination numbers are
ignored while valid requests are set.
2008 Error in entering XPOINT command parameter(s). Illegal entries have been included in the destination
Invalid crosspoint request(s) ignored. field of an XPOINT command. The invalid
crosspoints are ignored while valid requests are set.
The currently selected source is not a valid source
or not valid on the requested level. The command
requested will be skipped.

190 Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix F: Error Messages and Hexadecimal Numbers

Table F-1. Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 Error Messages (Continued)


Error No. Definition Explanation
2009 Current source value out of range for the requested The currently selected source is not a valid source
Level. Command entry ignored. or not valid on the requested level. The command
requested will be skipped.
CLASS 3 ERRORS
3002 No active levels have been detected. Check system The router has not found any active routing frames.
configuration. Instructions involving system information or
crosspoint operations will be disallowed.
3003 No system has been detected. This message is sent when the router has found no
Command entry ignored. active levels and a command has been issued
attempting to set crosspoints or to read system
status.
3004 Illegal configuration DIP switch setting. System This is a fatal error typically caused by having any
setup aborted, frame resetting. of the DIP switches in the wrong position.
3005 Too many levels set in frame. This error occurs when the resources of the I/O
All internal crosspoint resources ignored. Only modules, combined with the logic board DIP
operations external to the frame available. switch settings, cause the frame to set a level
number greater than 255. All internal resources will
then be ignored as if no I/O modules are present in
the frame.
3006 Illegal I/O board configuration setting. All internal This error is typically caused by errors in trying to
crosspoint resources ignored. Only operation configure a multiplexer I/O module (too many I/O
external to the frame available. modules are being combined for the particular
multiplexer module). All internal resources will be
ignored as if no I/O modules are present in the
frame.
3008 Too many sources or destinations set in frame. All This error occurs when the resources of the I/O
internal crosspoint resources ignored. Only modules, combined with the logic board DIP
operations external to frame available. switch settings, cause the frame to set a source
number or destination number greater than 4096.
All internal resources will be ignored as if no I/O
modules are present in the frame.
3009 Illegal front panel type setting. The local control panel settings on the router are
Front panel operations are disabled. invalid. Check the DIP switch configuration on the
router.

Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual 191
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix F: Error Messages and Hexadecimal Numbers

Zero-Based Hexadecimal Numbers


Pass-through protocol uses zero-based hexadecimal numbers for all levels,
sources, and destination numbers. For example, the first physical source
encountered for a router level, the pass-through protocol would call Source 0.
This is in contrast with terminal protocol, which would refer to this source as
Source 1 since terminal protocol is one-based decimal system.
These two number systems, along with the character equivalents, are shown in
Table F-2 on page 193.

192 Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix F: Error Messages and Hexadecimal Numbers

Table F-2. Decimal, Hexadecimal, and Character Equivalents

Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual 193
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix F: Error Messages and Hexadecimal Numbers

194 Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix G
Enhanced Resource Module Installation

Overview
This appendix contains information you will need to install an enhanced
resource module. It covers the following topics:
• “Removing the Existing Resource Module” on page 196
• “Installing the New Resource Module” on page 198
• “Reattaching the Front Panel” on page 199
For more information about enhanced resource modules, see “Resource
Module” on page 8.
The illustrations in this appendix show a 2RU frame; however, the instructions
apply equally to a 1RU frame.

Caution
Some Panacea front panel units do not have supporting hinges.
Consequently, if the front panel face plate is removed and not
handled properly, it can fall with sufficient force to dislocate and/or
damage the ribbon cable attached to the resource module
connector. When removing the front panel, hold the face plate
firmly to ensure that it does not become damaged.

Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual 195
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix G: Enhanced Resource Module Installation

Removing the Existing Resource Module


1. Unplug the Panacea frame so that it does not receive electrical power.
2. Unscrew the screws on the front of the Panacea front panel. (The screws in
the front panel are captive. Do not separate them from the front panel.)

Figure G-1. Removing the Screws from the Front Panel

3. Gently pull the front panel away from the frame.


4. Unscrew the eight 4-40×1/8 flat head screws (four on top, four on the
bottom) attaching the sub-panel assembly to the front panel. Set these
screws aside, as you will need them later.

Figure G-2. Separating the Sub-Panel Assembly from the Front


Panel

Caution
Do not attempt to remove the connector by pulling on the
ribbon cable. This will damage the connector.

5. Remove the cable retaining plate, then carefully remove the cable from the
resource module by grasping the outer edges of the connector and pulling it
away from the panel.

196 Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix G: Enhanced Resource Module Installation

6. Unscrew the ribbon cable retainer, then unplug the ribbon cable from the
connector on the resource module.

Figure G-3. Removing the Ribbon Cable

7. Pull the sub-panel assembly away from the front panel.


8. Unscrew the five 4-40×3/16 pan head screws attaching the resource module
to the sub-panel. Set these screws aside, as you will need them later.

Figure G-4. Removing the Screws from the Resource Module

9. Remove the resource module from the sub-panel.

Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual 197
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix G: Enhanced Resource Module Installation

Installing the New Resource Module


1. Insert the resource module tab (located at the module end next to the DIP
switches) into the slot in the front sub-panel, then slide the resource module
into place inside the sub-panel.

Figure G-5. Tab Insert Slot Location

2. Using five 4-40×3/16 pan head screws, attach the module to the front
sub-panel.

Figure G-6. Attaching the Enhanced Resource Module to the


Sub-Panel

198 Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix G: Enhanced Resource Module Installation

Reattaching the Front Panel


1. Align the sub-panel assembly with the front panel, then press the sub-panel
assembly into the rear side of the front panel.
2. Align the mounting holes of the two panels.
3. Using the eight 4-40×1/8 flat head screws, attach the sub-panel assembly to
the front panel.

Figure G-7. Attaching the Sub-Panel Assembly to the Front Panel

4. Plug the ribbon cable to the connector on the resource module.

Figure G-8. Plugging In the Ribbon Cable

5. Reattach the ribbon cable retaining plate.


6. Align the reassembled front module with the frame body.
7. Tighten the screws on the front of the panel. As you tighten the screws, the
front module will be pulled tight to the frame body.

Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual 199
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix G: Enhanced Resource Module Installation

200 Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix H
Power Supply Mounting Tray Installation

Overview
The Panacea product line includes an optional power supply mounting tray,
which allows you to mount up to seven 1RU desktop power supplies or up to
five 2RU desktop power supplies. You can mount a combination of 1RU and
2RU power supplies on the same tray. This power supply mounting tray can be
forward- or rear-mounted into a regular frame rack.
This appendix contains information you will need to mount a power supply to a
power supply frame and to mount a power supply frame into a rack. It covers
the following topics:
• “Tools You’ll Need” on page 202
• “Pre-Installation Checklist” on page 202
• “Installing a 1RU Desktop Power Supply” on page 203 and “Installing
Multiple 1RU Desktop Power Supplies” on page 205
• “Installing a 2RU Desktop Power Supply” on page 206 and “Installing
Multiple 2RU Desktop Power Supplies” on page 207
• “Installing a Combination of 1RU and 2RU Desktop Power Supplies” on
page 209
• “Installing a Power Supply Mounting Tray into a Frame Rack” on page 209
For more information about Panacea power supplies, see “Power Supply
Module” on page 10.

Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual 201
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix H: Power Supply Mounting Tray Installation

Tools You’ll Need


• One standard 19-in. (48.3-cm) equipment rack
• One power supply mounting tray kit containing
• One power supply mounting tray
• Seven 4-in.×2-in. VELCRO® “hook” and “loop” strip sets1
• Twenty 4-40×3/4 flat-head screws
• One size T-10 star screwdriver (for 2RU desktop power supply only)
• One Phillips-head screwdriver (for 2RU desktop power supply only)
• For a 1RU: One to seven 1RU desktop power supplies (P-1RU-PS-O)
OR
For a 2RU: One to five 2RU desktop power supplies (P-2RU-PS-O)

Pre-Installation Checklist
Note
See page 52 for more information on these items.
• Adequate rack space? The power supply mounting tray mounts in a
standard 19-in. (48.3-cm) equipment rack and requires the equivalent of two
rack units of space (3.5 in. [88 mm] of standard rack space) when a
P-2RU-PS-O power supply is installed.
• Proper temperature and ventilation? An ambient temperature should be
maintained between 32° F (0° C) and 122° F (50° C) at a relative humidity
of 10%-90% (non-condensing).
• Adequate electrical requirements? Both the 1RU and the 2RU power
supplies have a continuous input range of 100 VAC to 240 VAC.

1 “VELCRO”
is a registered trademark of Velcro Industries B.V.

202 Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix H: Power Supply Mounting Tray Installation

Installing a 1RU Desktop Power Supply


1. If necessary, clean off the surface of the power supply and the power supply
mounting tray where you plan to attach the VELCRO fastener.
VELCRO comes in pieces that are referred to as “hook” and “loop” (see
Figure H-1).
• “Hook” VELCRO has rows of small hooks on the side opposite the
adhesive.
• “Loop” VELCRO has a soft, felt appearance on the side opposite the
adhesive.

Figure H-1. VELCRO Pieces

When a piece of “hook” VELCRO and a piece of “loop” VELCRO are


pressed together, they form a tight bond that is secure, yet easily separated.
When following the instructions for mounting the P-1RU-PS-O power
supply to the power supply tray, always use a piece of “hook” VELCRO in
combination with a piece of “loop” VELCRO, or you will not achieve a
VELCRO bond.
2. Press the piece of “hook” VELCRO to the piece of “loop” VELCRO so that
the pieces are bonded.
3. Peel the tape away from the adhesive on the “loop” side of the VELCRO
strip, then press the strip firmly into place on the back of the power supply.

Caution
Make sure you do not cover up the Safety information listed on
the power supply.

Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual 203
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix H: Power Supply Mounting Tray Installation

Figure H-2. Location of VELCRO Strips

Moving the VELCRO strip from its original location will weaken the
adhesive’s “sticking” capability and may damage the paint surface on the
power supply mounting tray.
4. Peel the tape away from the adhesive on the “hook” side of the VELCRO
strip, then press the power supply firmly into place on the power supply
mounting tray (see Figure H-3).

Figure H-3. 1RU Power Supply Mounted on Power Supply Mounting


Tray

5. Wait five minutes for the tape adhesive to set.


204 Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix H: Power Supply Mounting Tray Installation

Installing Multiple 1RU Desktop Power Supplies


1. If necessary, clean off the surface of each power supply and the power
supply mounting tray where you plan to attach the VELCRO fasteners.
2. Press the piece of “hook” VELCRO to the piece of “loop” VELCRO so that
the pieces are bonded.
3. Refer to Figure H-4 for a guide to positioning the power supplies.

Figure H-4. 1RU Power Supply Positioning Guide

Moving the VELCRO strip from its original location will weaken the
adhesive’s “sticking” capability and may damage the paint surface on the
power supply mounting tray.
4. Peel the tape away from the adhesive on the “loop” side of each VELCRO
strip, then press each strip firmly into place on the back of each power
supply.

Caution
Make sure you do not cover up the Safety information listed on
the power supply.
5. Peel the tape away from the adhesive on the “hook” side of each VELCRO
strip, then press each power supply firmly into place on the power supply
mounting tray.
6. Wait five minutes for the tape adhesive to set.

Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual 205
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix H: Power Supply Mounting Tray Installation

Installing a 2RU Desktop Power Supply


1. On the reverse side of the power supply, remove the rubber feet from each
corner. A star-head screw will then be visible at each corner.

Figure H-5. Location of Screws on Power Supply

Caution
Do not use a Phillips head screwdriver to remove screws. If
you do, you may strip the threads on the screw head.

2. Using a T-10 star screwdriver, remove the screws from the power supply.
Handle the power supply carefully. With the screws out, the
power supply case may separate.
3. Line up the screw holes on the power supply with the screw holes on the
power supply mounting tray. (It may be easier to position the tray above the
power supply, as shown in Figure H-6.)
4. Insert the flat-head screws into the screw holes.

206 Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix H: Power Supply Mounting Tray Installation

Figure H-6. Alignment of Power Supply Mounting Tray and Power


Supply

5. Using a Phillips-head screwdriver, tighten the screws until the heads are
flush with the tray surface. You may feel some resistance as you tighten the
screws. This is normal.

Installing Multiple 2RU Desktop Power Supplies


1. On the reverse side of each power supply, remove the rubber feet from each
corner. A star-head screw will then be visible at each corner (see Figure H-5
on page 206).

Caution
Do not use a Phillips head screwdriver to remove screws. If
you do, you may strip the threads on the screw head.
2. Using a T-10 star screwdriver, remove the screws from the power supply.
Handle the power supply carefully. With the screws out, the
power supply case may separate.

Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual 207
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix H: Power Supply Mounting Tray Installation

3. Line up the screw holes on the power supplies with the screw holes on the
power supply mounting tray. (It will be easier to position the tray above the
power supply.) Refer to Figure H-7 for a guide to positioning the power
supplies.

Figure H-7. 2RU Power Supply Positioning Guide

4. Insert the flat-head screws into the screw holes (see Figure H-6 on
page 207).
5. Using a Phillips-head screwdriver, tighten the screws until their heads are
flush with the tray surface. You may feel some resistance as you tighten the
screws. This is normal.

208 Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix H: Power Supply Mounting Tray Installation

Installing a Combination of 1RU and 2RU


Desktop Power Supplies
The procedures for installing both 1RU and 2RU desktop power supplies onto
one power supply mounting tray are the same as described above. Since the
process for installing a 2RU desktop power supply is more involved, you may
want to install the 2RU desktop power supply first, then install the 1RU power
supply.
Make sure that the power supplies are mounted side-by-side, not one on top of
the other.

Installing a Power Supply Mounting Tray into a


Frame Rack
1. Mount the tray in a standard equipment rack. You can mount the tray in
either the front or the back.
2. Align the tray so that all 4 screw holes in the mounting ears match up with
those in the rack.
3. Secure the tray to the rack with the rack screws and washers.
4. Plug each power supply into its corresponding Panacea routing switcher.

Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual 209
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix H: Power Supply Mounting Tray Installation

210 Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix I
Fan Module Replacement

Overview
Note
The fan module is only necessary with certain formats (e.g.,
analog audio and high definition).
The optional fan module is easily replaced in the field in the event of a fan
failure. There are no configuration settings needed for the fan module.
This appendix covers the following topics:
• “Uninstalling an Existing Fan Module” on page 212
• “Installing a Replacement Fan Module” on page 213
For general information about the fan module, see page 12.
The illustrations in this appendix show a 2RU frame; however, the instructions
apply equally to a 1RU frame.

Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual 211
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix I: Fan Module Replacement

Uninstalling an Existing Fan Module


1. Remove the screws on the front of the Panacea front panel. (The screws in
the front panel are captive. Do not separate them from the front panel.)

Figure I-1. Removing the Screws from the Front Panel

2. Gently pull the front panel away from the frame.


3. Move the front panel to expose the frame interior.
4. Grasping the fan module between your thumb and forefinger, pull the fan
module out of the frame.

Figure I-2. Removing the Existing Fan Module

212 Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix I: Fan Module Replacement

Installing a Replacement Fan Module


1. Locate the pin assembly on the fan module and the pin connector inside the
frame (see Figure I-3).
2. With the pin assembly facing the pin connector inside the frame, carefully
guide the fan module into place. (Make sure that the module lines up with
the recessed guides on the top and bottom of the frame.)

Figure I-3. Guiding the Fan Module Into Place

Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual 213
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Appendix I: Fan Module Replacement

3. Push the fan module in until it stops. The module will lock in place when it
sets securely.

Figure I-4. Proper Fan Module Placement

4. Align the front module with the frame body.


5. Tighten the screws on the front of the panel. As you tighten the screws, the
front module will be pulled tight to the the frame body.

214 Panacea Series Frame Reference and System Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Index

Keywords

A module interconnect 17
matrix sizes 17
Advanced timing mode 72
monitoring and control 18
AES audio
power conversion and distribution 18
asynchronous switching 43
product description 16–20
configuration 49, 86–87
signal flow diagram 18, 20
control and communications 49
specifications 126–127
cross-fade processing 44–45
Analog video
dual matrix same signal formats 50
configuration 23, 75
installation 50
control and communications 23
main features 46
dual matrix same signal formats 24
major components 46–48
installation 23
back panel I⁄O module 47
main features 21
core routing module 47
major components 21–22
crosspoint PLD 47
back panel I⁄O module 21
input receiver 47
core routing module 21
module interconnect 47
module interconnect 21
output driver 47
matrix sizes 21
matrix sizes 46
monitoring and control 22
monitoring and control 48
power conversion and distribution 22
P-04Q submodule option 43–45, 86
product description 21–23
power conversion and distribution 48
signal data rate 22
product description 43–49
signal flow diagram 23
signal flow diagram 49
signal path 23
specifications 136–137
specifications 128–129
switching fundamentals 43–45
switching point 22
synchronous switching 44
Asynchronous switching 43
Alarm jumper configuration 63
Auto timing mode 71
Alarm list, device 186
Alarm⁄comm port 69–70 B
ALM⁄COM. See Alarm⁄comm port
Analog audio Back panel connections
configuration 20, 73–75 alarm⁄comm port 69–70
control and communications 18 Ethernet connection 72
dual matrix same signal formats 20 I⁄O modules 72
installation 20 AES audio 47, 73
main features 17 analog audio 17, 72
major components 17 analog video 21, 72
back panel I⁄O module 17 clean⁄quiet switch 40
core routing module 17 serial digital video 32, 72

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 215
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Index

serial port 70 enhanced modules 161–183


sync port 71 standard modules 153–160
advanced timing mode 72 User account subcommands 177
auto timing mode 71 XPOINT 160, 165
standard timing mode 71 ZERO 160, 165
X-Y port 71 Communications
AES audio 49
C analog audio 18
Clean⁄quiet switch analog video 23
configuration 42, 77–85 serial digital video 34
data rates 40 Compliance standards xiii
front panel 41 Components
independent mode 37 AES audio 46–48
main features 38–39 back panel I⁄O module 47
major components 39–40 core routing module 47
back panel I⁄O module 40 crosspoint PLD 47
core routing module 39 input receiver 47
crosspoint matrix 39 module interconnect 47
input equalization 39 output driver 47
module interconnect 40 analog audio 17
output driver 40 back panel I⁄O module 17
married mode 37 core routing module 17
matrix sizes 38 module interconnect 17
monitoring and control 41 analog video 21–22
power conversion and distribution 41 back panel I⁄O module 21
product description 37–38 core routing module 21
signal flow diagram 41 module interconnect 21
specifications 134–135 clean⁄quiet switch 39–40
submatrices 37 back panel I⁄O module 40
sync input signal 40 core routing module 39
Command line 96 crosspoint matrix 39
Commands input equalization 39
DESTINATION 155, 164 module interconnect 40
Ethernet subcommands 166–168 output driver 40
file system subcommands 168 serial digital video 31–32
hardware options subcommands 169–171 back panel I⁄O module 32
INFORMATION 155, 164 core routing module 31
LEVEL 155, 164 input equalization 31
POLL 155, 164 module interconnect 32
QUERY 155, 164 output driver 32
READ 155, 164 Configuration
REBOOT 165 frame 62–73
SHOW MENU E. See Ethernet subcommands alarm jumper 63
SHOW MENU F. See File system subcommands back panel connections 69–73
SHOW MENU H. See Hardware options DIP switch summary, resource module 62
subcommands DIP switches, resource module 64–68
SHOW MENU P. See Protocol configuration jumper summary 62
subcommands modules
SHOW MENU U. See User account subcommands AES audio 49, 86–87
SOURCE 156, 164 analog audio 20, 73–75
TERMINAL 160, 165 analog video 23, 75
terminal commands clean⁄quiet switch 42, 77–85

216 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Index

serial digital video 35, 75–76 E


power supply modules 57
Telnet configuration 152 Electrical requirements 52
virtual (network) X-Y configuration 152 Electrical specifications 124
Configuration utility 15 EMC standards 144–145
Control features Enhanced resource module
AES audio 48 installation 195–199
analog audio 18 terminal operation commands 161–183
analog video 22 Error messages 189–193
clean⁄quiet switch 41 Establishing a Telnet session for Ethernet control
firmware-based control system 91 interface products 150
front panel 13 Establishing a terminal operation session for serial control
front panel options 41, 90 interface products 149
list 13 Ethernet connection 72
serial digital video 33 Ethernet subcommands
software 15 SAVE SYSCONFIG 168
software-based control system 91 SET APACHESTOP 167
Control functionality SET BOOTDEFAULTS 166
AES audio 49 SET GATEWAY 166
analog audio 18 SET IP 166
analog video 23 SET NETMASK 166
DIP switch mode 56, 92 SET PING 166
program mode 56, 92 SET TDISCONNECTUSER 167
serial digital video 34 SET TMAXCONNECTIONS 167
Control software 15 SET VDISCONNECTUSER 168
Core routing module 6 SET VMAXCONNECTIONS 167
Cross-fade processing 44–45 SHOW IPDISPLAY 166
Crosspoint matrix SHOW TCONNECTIONS 167
clean⁄quiet switch 39 SHOW TELNET 167
Crosspoint PLD SHOW VIRTUALXY 167
AES audio 47 SHOW VXYCONNECTIONS 168

D F
D# command. See DESTINATION command Fan module
Data rates description 12
clean⁄quiet switch 40 replacement 211–214
serial digital video 33 Features
DESTINATION command 155, 164 AES audio 46
Device alarm list 186 analog audio 17
DIP switches analog video 21
configuration 64–68 clean⁄quiet switch 38–39
DIP switch mode 56, 92 control features 13, 90
P-04Q 86 front panel 13
troubleshooting 114–115 software 15
Directives frame 3–4
Restriction on Hazardous Substances xiv serial digital video 25
Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment xv Field upgrading modules 59
Dual matrix same signal formats File system subcommands
AES audio 50 GET BOOTFILE 168
analog audio 20 SET BOOTFILE 168
analog video 24 SET FILEDEL 168
serial digital video 35–36 SHOW FILES 168

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 217
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Index

SHOW FS 168 GET BOOTFILE command 168


Frame GET HWFILE command 171
configuration 62–73 GET MPFILE command 173, 175
alarm jumper 63 GET RECLOCKMODE command 169
back panel connections 69–73 GET TIME command 175
DIP switches, resource module 64–68 GVG TEN-XL ASCII
control features 13–15 operation
front panel 13 definitions 98
software 15 examples 101
DIP switch summary, resource module 62 exceptions 99
installation 52–58 programming reference 98
control functionality 56 serial data format 98
in-frame architecture 56 string structures 99
mechanical dimensions 53–54 GVG TEN-XL SMPTE
mounting 55 operation
mounting requirements 53 definition 103
jumper summary 62 examples 110
main features 3–4 exceptions 105
modules packet structures 106
core routing module 6 programming reference 104
enhanced resource module 9 reserved words 104
fan module 12 serial data format 103
module interconnect 7
power supply module 10 H
power supply mounting tray 10 Hardware options subcommands
resource module 8–9 GET HWFILE 171
standard resource module 9 GET RECLOCKMODE 169
product description 2–3 SAVE HW 171
sizes and types 4–5 SAVE SYSCONFIG 171
Frame subcommands SET ALARMENABLE 169
GET MPFILE 175 SET AUTOTIME 169
GET TIME 175 SET EQBYPASS 170
SAVE MP 174 SET HWFILE 171
SAVE SYSCONFIG 175 SET RECLOCKMODE 169
SET FIRSTDESTINATION 174 SET SLEWRATE 170
SET FIRSTLEVEL 174 SET TIMING 171
SET FIRSTSOURCE 174 SHOW ALARMS 169
SET MPFILE 174 SHOW EQBYPASS 170
SET RMODE 176 SHOW INPUTS 169
SET SYNCTIME 176 SHOW RECLOCKMODES 169
SET TIME 175 SHOW RECLOCKSTATUS 169
SET TIMESERVER 175 SHOW SLEWRATE 170
SET TIMEZONE 175 SHOW TIMING 171
SHOW OFFSETS 174 Hexadecimal numbers 189–193
SHOW PANELLEVELS 174
SHOW RPARM 174 I-K
SHOW TIMESERVER 175
I command. See INFORMATION command
Front panel option 13
Independent mode 37
G INFORMATION command 155, 164
In-frame architecture 56
Gateway network configuration from terminal control Injury precautions 141
mode 150 Input equalization

218 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Index

clean⁄quiet switch 39 Matrix sizes


serial digital video 31 3 Gb/s serial digital video 30
Input receiver AES audio 46
AES audio 47 analog audio 17
Input specifications analog video 21
3 Gb 132 clean⁄quiet switch 38
AES audio 136 high definition serial digital video 28
analog audio 126 standard definition serial digital video 27, 27–28
analog video 128 Matrix subcommands
clean⁄quiet switch 134 GET MPFILE 173
HS/S 130 SAVE MP 173
Input⁄output specifications 125 SAVE SYSCONFIG 173
Installation SET COMBINERMODE 173
enhanced resource module 195–199 SET COMBINERSIZE 173
field upgrading 59 SET MP 172
frame 52–58 SET MPARM 172
control functionality 56 SET MPFILE 173
in-frame architecture 56 SHOW COMBINER 172
mechanical dimensions 53–54 SHOW MP 172
mounting 55 Mechanical dimensions, frame 53–54
mounting requirements 53 Mechanical specifications 124
modules 59 MENU E commands. See Ethernet subcommands
AES audio 50 MENU F commands. See File system subcommands
analog audio 20 MENU H commands. See Hardware options
analog video 23 subcommands
serial digital video 35 MENU U commands. See User account subcommands
siting requirements 52 MI. See Module interconnect
electrical requirement 52 Modes
rack space 52 DIP switch 92
temperature 52 program 92
ventilation 52 Module interconnect 7
Introduction AES audio 47
frame information 2–15 analog audio 17
control features 13 analog video 21
main features 3–4 clean⁄quiet switch 40
product description 2–3 serial digital video 32
sizes and types 4–5 Module specifications
module information 16–50 3 Gb 132–133
AES audio 43–49 AES audio 136–137
analog audio 16–20 analog audio 126–127
analog video 21–23 analog video 128–129
clean⁄quiet switch 37–42 clean⁄quiet switch 134–135
serial digital video 24–36 multirate⁄standard 130–131
Modules
L configuration
L# command. See LEVEL command AES audio 49, 86–87
LEDs 6 analog audio 20, 73–75
LEVEL command 155, 164 analog video 23, 75
clean⁄quiet switch 42, 77–85
M-N serial digital video 35, 75–76
control and communications
Manual information viii–x
AES audio 49
Married mode 25, 37

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 219
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Index

analog audio 18 high definition serial digital video 28


analog video 23 standard definition serial digital video 27, 27–28
serial digital video 34 monitoring and control
data rates AES audio 48
clean⁄quiet switch 40 analog audio 18
serial digital video 33 analog video 22
description clean⁄quiet switch 41
AES audio 43–49 serial digital video 33
analog audio 16–20 power conversion and distribution
analog video 21–23 AES audio 48
clean⁄quiet switch 37–38 analog audio 18
serial digital video 24–36 analog video 22
dual matrix same signal formats clean⁄quiet switch 41
AES audio 50 serial digital video 34
analog audio 20 signal flow diagrams
analog video 24 AES audio 49
serial digital video 35–36 analog audio 18, 20
enhanced resource module 161–183, 195–199 analog video 23
fan module 211–214 clean⁄quiet switch 41
features serial digital video 34
AES audio 46 standard resource module 153–160
analog audio 17 sync input signal
analog video 21 clean⁄quiet switch 40
clean⁄quiet switch 38–39 serial digital video 33
serial digital video 25 Monitoring features
field upgrading 59 AES audio 48
frame 5–12 analog audio 18
core routing module 6 analog video 22
enhanced resource module 9 clean⁄quiet switch 41
fan module 12 serial digital video 33
module interconnect 7 Mounting requirements, frame 53
power supply module 10 Mounting, frame 55
power supply mounting tray 10 Multirate⁄standard specifications 130–131
resource module 8–9
standard resource module 9 O
installation 59 Operating modes 15
AES audio 50 Operation
analog audio 20 control features
analog video 23 firmware-based control system 91
serial digital video 35 front panel options 90
major components software-based control system 91
AES audio 46–48 control functionality
analog audio 17 DIP switch mode 92
analog video 21–22 program mode 92
clean⁄quiet switch 39–40 Options
serial digital video 31–32 clean⁄quiet switch
matrix sizes independent mode 37
3 Gb/s serial digital video 30 married mode 37
AES audio 46 submatrices 37
analog audio 17 front panel 13, 41, 90
analog video 21 power supply mounting tray 10
clean⁄quiet switch 38 serial digital video

220 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Index

married mode 25 safety xv


reclocking submodule 32 Preventing electrostatic discharge 141
separate mode 25 Product damage precautions 142
submatrices 25 Product description
Output driver frame 2–3
AES audio 47 Product servicing xi
clean⁄quiet switch 40 Product standards xii–xiii
serial digital video 32 Program mode 56, 92
Output specifications
3 Gb 132 Q-R
AES audio 136 Q command. See QUERY command
analog audio 126 QUERY command 155, 164
analog video 128 R# command. See READ command
clean⁄quiet switch 134 Rack space 52
HS/S 130 READ command 155, 164
REBOOT 165
P Reclocking submodule 32
P# command. See POLL command Reference signal input. See Sync port
P-04Q 43–45, 86 Resource module 8–9
Performance specifications Resource modules
3 Gb 133 enhanced 9
AES audio 137 standard 9
analog audio 127 Restriction on Hazardous Substances (RoHS) directive
analog video 129 xiv
clean⁄quiet switch 135 RouterMapper configuration utility 15
HS/S 131 Routing module
POLL command 155, 164 AES audio 47
Power analog audio 17
conversion analog video 21
AES audio 48 clean⁄quiet switch 39
analog audio 18 serial digital video 31
analog video 22 RS-232 pin assignments 94
clean⁄quiet switch 41 RS-232 serial port configuration 95
serial digital video 34 RS-422 pin assignments 94
distribution RS-422 serial port configuration 95
AES audio features
AES audio 48 S
analog audio features S# command. See SOURCE command
analog audio 18 Safety
analog video features RoHS directive xiv
analog video 22 WEEE directive xv
clean⁄quiet switch features Safety precautions xv, 139–146
clean⁄quiet switch 41 injury precautions 141
serial digital video features preventing electrostatic discharge 141
serial digital video 34 product damage precautions 142
Power supply module 10 safety terms and symbols in this manual 140
Power supply modules 57 safety terms and symbols on the product 140
Power supply mounting tray 10 Safety standards xiii
installation 201–209 SAVE HW command 171
Precautions SAVE MP command 173, 174
injury 141 SAVE SYSCONFIG command 168, 171, 173, 175
product damage 142 SAVE USER command 177

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 221
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Index

Separate mode 25 SET EQBYPASS command 157, 170


Serial control SET FILEDEL command 168
configuration 94–95 SET FIRSTDESTINATION command 158, 174, 181–
RS-232 95 183
RS-422 95 SET FIRSTLEVEL command 158, 174, 178–179
operation SET FIRSTSOURCE command 158, 174, 180–181
GVG TEN-XL ASCII 98–102 SET GATEWAY command 166
GVG TEN-XL SMPTE 103–112 SET HWFILE command 171
Harris terminal protocol 95–97 SET IP command 166
pin assignments SET MP command 156, 172
RS-232 94 SET MPARM command 172
RS-422 94 SET MPFILE command 173, 174
Serial digital audio. See AES audio SET NETMASK command 166
Serial digital video SET PANELLEVELS command 158
configuration 35, 75–76 SET PASSWORD command 177
control and communications 34 SET PING command 166
data rates 33 SET RECLOCKMODE command 158, 169
dual matrix same signal formats 35–36 SET RMODE command 176
installation 35 SET SLEWRATE command 159, 170
main features 25 SET SYNCTIME command 176
major components 31–32 SET TDISCONNECTUSER command 167
back panel I⁄O module 32 SET TIME command 175
core routing module 31 SET TIMESERVER command 175
input equalization 31 SET TIMEZONE command 175
module interconnect 32 SET TIMING command 159, 171
output driver 32 SET TMAXCONNECTIONS command 167
married mode 25 SET USERGROUP command 177
matrix sizes SET VDISCONNECTUSER command 168
3 Gb/s 30 SET VMAXCONNECTIONS command 167
high definition 28 SHOW ALARMS command 159, 169
standard definition 27, 27–28 SHOW COMBINER command 159, 172
monitoring and control 33 SHOW EQBYPASS command 170
options SHOW FILES command 168
reclocking submodule 32 SHOW FS command 168
power conversion and distribution 34 SHOW ID command 159
product description 24–36 SHOW INPUTS command 159, 169
reclocking submodule 32 SHOW IPDISPLAY command 166
separate mode 25 SHOW MENU commands
signal flow diagram 34 SHOW MENU E. See Ethernet subcommands
submatrices 25 SHOW MENU F. See File system subcommands
sync input signal 33 SHOW MENU H. See Hardware options
Serial digital video (3 Gb) specifications 132–133 subcommands
Serial port 70 SHOW MENU P. See Protocol control
Servicing product xi subcommands
SET ALARMENABLE command 156, 169 SHOW MENU U. See User account subcommands
SET APACHESTOP command 167 SHOW MP command 159, 172
SET AUTOTIME command 169 SHOW OFFSETS command 159, 174
SET BOOTDEFAULTS command 166 SHOW OUTPUTS command 159
SET BOOTFILE command 168 SHOW PANELLEVELS command 160, 174
SET COMBINERMODE command 157, 173 SHOW RECLOCKMODES command 160, 169
SET COMBINERSIZE command 157, 173 SHOW RECLOCKSETTINGS command 160
SET DELETEUSER command 177 SHOW RECLOCKSTATUS command 169

222 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Index

SHOW RPARM command 174 AES audio 137


SHOW SLEWRATE command 170 analog audio 127
SHOW TCONNECTIONS command 167 analog video 129
SHOW TELNET command 167 clean⁄quiet switch 135
SHOW TIMESERVER command 175 HS/S 131
SHOW TIMING command 160, 171 Standard resource module
SHOW USERS command 177 description 9
SHOW VIRTUALXY command 167 terminal operation commands 153–160
SHOW VXYCONNECTIONS command 168 Standard timing mode 71
Signal data rate 22 Standards
Signal flow diagrams compliance standards xiii
AES audio 49 EMC standards 144–145
analog audio 18, 20 product standards xii–xiii
analog video 23 safety standards xiii, 146
clean⁄quiet switch 41 Submatrices 25, 37
serial digital video 34 Switching
Signal path 23 asynchronous 43
Siting requirements 52 cross-fade processing 44–45
Sizes, frame 4–5 synchronous 44
Software-based control systems 15 Switching point
configuration utility 15 analog video 22
control software 15 Sync input signal
operating modes 15 clean⁄quiet switch 40
SOURCE command 156, 164 serial digital video 33
Specifications Sync port 71
frame advanced timing mode 72
electrical specifications 124 auto timing mode 71
input⁄output signal specifications 125 standard timing mode 71
mechanical specifications 124 Synchronous switching 44
input
3 Gb 132 T
AES audio 136 T command. See TERMINAL command
analog audio 126 Telnet configuration 152
analog video 128 Temperature needs, frame 52
clean⁄quiet switch 134 TERMINAL command 160, 165
HS/S 130 Terminal operations
module establishing a session for serial control interface
3 Gb 132–133 products 149
AES audio 136–137 establishing a Telnet session for Ethernet control
analog audio 126–127 interface products 150
analog video 128–129 establishing a terminal operation session 148
clean⁄quiet switch 134–135 gateway network configuration from terminal control
multirate⁄standard 130–131 mode 150
output terminal operation commands
3 Gb 132 enhanced module 161–183
AES audio 136 standard module 153–160
analog audio 126 user management 152
analog video 128 virtual (network) X-Y configuration 152
clean⁄quiet switch 134 Terminal protocol
HS/S 130 GVG TEN-XL ASCII 98–102
performance definitions 98
3 Gb 133 examples 101

Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual 223
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Index

exceptions 99 DIP switches 114–115


operation 98–102 Genlock connectors 118
programming reference 98 modem cable 115
string structures 99 P-MI module placement 117
GVG TEN-XL SMPTE 103–112 programmed configuration 119
definition 103 resource module ribbon cable 116
examples 110 X-Y connectors 118
exceptions 105 Types, frame 4–5
operation 103–112
packet structures 106 U-Z
programming reference 104 Unpacking a Leitch product xi
reserved words 104 User account subcommands
serial data format 103 SAVE USER 177
Harris SET DELETEUSER 177
command line 96 SET PASSWORD 177
communications interlocking 95 SET USERGROUP 177
data format 95 SHOW USERS 177
DIP switch settings 95 User management 152
system operations 97 Ventilation needs, frame 52
system queries 97 Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE)
Timing mode directive xv
advanced 72 X command. See XPOINT command
auto 71 XPOINT command 160, 165
standard 71 X-Y port 71
Troubleshooting Z command. See ZERO command
checking Ethernet settings 121–122 ZERO command 160, 165
checking serial settings

224 Panacea Series Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual

You might also like

pFad - Phonifier reborn

Pfad - The Proxy pFad of © 2024 Garber Painting. All rights reserved.

Note: This service is not intended for secure transactions such as banking, social media, email, or purchasing. Use at your own risk. We assume no liability whatsoever for broken pages.


Alternative Proxies:

Alternative Proxy

pFad Proxy

pFad v3 Proxy

pFad v4 Proxy